Th e dedicates this book to al

au th or learn es t an d
s in cere men an d women , irres p ective of ra ce or

creed, wh o are en gaged i n a con s cious e ff ort of

ma kin g this worl d a better pl a ce to l —

ive in , a
worl d wh erein n ot on l y m a n
’
s p h ys i cal n ee ds

s h al lb e fu l ly s u pp l
i ed
, b u t on e w h ere i n l
ov e an d
mercy p eace an d good wil
, l jus ti ce an d equ ity
,

s h al lprevail ; a worl d in which s h al lb e fu l ly a n d

freely expres s ed tha t h ealth an d h appin ess wh i ch
i s s o n eces s a ry to a l lcompl ete h a rmon i ou s l i vi n g
.
 CO NTENTS

PRE FACE
m
c

I D EF I N ITI ON O F TER M S
.

II RE LATI VE UN DERSTA N D I N G
.

III THE PSY C H I C P LA N E

.

I V T H E TREE O F KNO WLEDG E

.

V . T H E M I N D S B OO K O F L I FE
’

VI . THE F OURT H D I M E NSI ON

VII . THE D I SCOVE RY O F A NE W WORLD
V III . THE E VO LUTION O F D ES I RE
I! . M ED ITATI ON T H E P A T H T O
,

PO WE R
! . LI FE I N E ! PRESS I ON
! I . M E N TAL AN D P H Y S I CAL WH O LE
N E SS
! II . T H E CREATI ON OF A WORLD
! III . TH E CON TRO LL ED LI FE
! IV . THE LAW OF REC I PROC ITY
! V . THE B REAT H OF LI FE
! VI . S Y M PAT H ETI C TE LE PATH Y
! VII . A TT UN ED TO LI F E
! VIII . THE TREE O F L I F E
 PREF ACE

Th e wo rld to day i s i n one o f it s histo ry

-

making epochs . Unrest is universal Th e old .

lan dma rks are di sappea ring ; change follows

change in quick succession creed an d dogma
,

a re thin gs of the past ; rel igious c e r emonial and

form no longer intere st the mass e s Some say .

religion is de ad and infidelity is rampant and

, ,

th e orthodox p r ophe t of ev il decla re s that the

v ery foundations of rel igion mo ral ity and or
, ,

d er a re being sw e pt away .

Th e proph e t of th e n e w tim e de cla re s that it

i s only the da rkn e ss that p recede s the dawn ;
that th ere neve r was a tim e in th e history of
th e wo rld wh en man d e si red to know th e truth
as he doe s at the p resent ; that it i s this de si re
which cause s th e un rest Religious life lik e all
.
,

life i s ev ol utionary Th e orthodoxy o r h et e r

, .

O doxy of th e past is n ot sufficient fo r th e p re s

ent Th e rel i gion that satisfie d th e boy or th e

.

youth wi ll n ot s upply the n ee ds of the full

grown man .

We a re facing compl ex probl em s fo r whi ch

the da rk age s of the wo rld Off er little or no solu
 IO Pref ace

ti on In other words man h as come to a pl ace

.
,

in his devel opmen t Where he realizes at l ast the

necessity for wo rki ng out his oWn sal v a

5/ H e i s be gi n n i ng to kn o w t h at
such a sal vation
should in clude his body H e is beginning to
.

believe that he should have the po wer to lay

i t down or to take i t up ; th at h is body shou ld
,

respon d to his will c onc erning it be come e x ,

emp t from dis e ase an d neith er be s u bj e ct to

,

d eca y o r O l
d age Slowly it h as been dawning
.

in the mind of man t hat his body was c reat e d

by his own soul an d mind an d shoul d be tho r ,

oughly s ubj ect t o all his lawfu l d e si re s and

—
will con ce rning it a fit in strument to carry ou t
al lhis purpo ses .

Furthermore man is seekin g a s al vation for

,

hi s mind from the s ense o f s in which has

w eighed like a great bu rden upon it Little by .

little he h as realized that the l aw of s in an d

death i s al lof hi s own making ; th at it is a lack

o f kn owledge that cau ses him to se e every
thin g in a parti al or incompl ete way It wa s .

h is thought of s eparate ness in th e past that

c aused him to thin k o f himself as detach e d o r
apart from al lthe re st o f c re ati on ca used h im
,

to become centere d in his p er s onal l ife inste ad ,

o f in the un iversal life H e failed to see that

.

he was not only rel ated to the Source O f his h e

 Preface II

in g, but to al ll i fe an d its exp res sion ; that he

wa s essen ti ally on e wi th the li fe of God an d
'

his s in c ame from wan t o f belief an d lac k o f

confo rmi ty to th is greates t o f t ruths With the .

in flux o f this kn owledge sin with its burden of , ,

diseas e an d death will pa s s away an d man will

, ,

fin d his real s el f—th e s elf that h as been oh

s cu red by the c l ouds o f hi s own men tali ty his -

s oul s elf the cen tral flam e of his bei g an d

, n —
ev e r a fter h is li fe wi ll be i llumin ed from
wi thi n .

Di vi ne un re st mu st of n ec essity con ti nue un

ti l such illumin ation is an acc ompli shed fact .

Th e w orl d to day is in an exp ec tan t atti tude A

-
.

great spiritu al ti dal wave i s near at han d an d ,

when it h as s wept over the world a n ew light

will have com e in to the life of man Th at .

l ight h aving its cen te r in the in n er li fe o f every

,

i ndividual will radi ate life an d light to th e ci r

,

cumf eren ce o f man s wo rld

’
.

Dea th as n ow un d e rs tood wi ll c ease to be

, , .

Th e ti m e w i ll certainly c ome when the highly

developed man will have the power to l ay down

o r ta ke up hi s life through a con s ci ous kn owl

,

edge O f the laws of ete rnal be ing an d the direct

applica ti o n o f the s e l aw s to his own l i fe .

Th e professed followers of the Foun der o f

Ch ristianity clai m that t his h as bee n done by
thei r M aster but they ign ore hi s statement that
,
12 Preface

Greater thuT gS th an the s e s h a ll ye d o B e

.

cau se of lack of kn owledge and un beli ef the

g rea ter thing s h a ve n o t be e n don e .

I beli ev e it to be the le gitimate birthright O f

eve ry man bo rn into the wo rld to be physically
whol e an d m e ntally happy My so l e thou ght in
.

writing this boo k is that it may bring more

light to the minds of thos e who a re s e eking a f
ter a greater knowl edge of th e laws of life and ,

Whos e e arn e st d e sire i t is to apply su ch l aws .

I wo ul d ask of th e read er there fo re a ca re ful

, , ,

as w el l as a tho u ghtful st u dy O f a l l th e que s

ti ons discussed s o that he may te st th e t ruth

,

an d p rove for hims e l f that p rofit may accr ue to

,

his life as the res ul t of the thought and study

gi ve n to the c ont ents of this book .

I realize how imp e rfect is th e setting fo r s o

gre at a subj ect as that u pon which I h ave at
tempted to w rite I prophe sy howeve r that in
.
, ,

th e n e a r f u ture some great soul enlighte ned by

,

th e indw elling spi rit will come fo rth an d gi ve

,

in a large r an d more complete way that which I ,

whil e s ee ing am n ot fully able to express

, .

CHARLES B RODIE PATTERSO N, F l

oren ce, Ital
y .
 NEW HEAVEN AND
NEW EARTH
I

D EF I NIT IO N O F TERMS
In the study o f th e followin g ch apters a defi
n ition o f te rm s used is nec e ssary in order th at

th ere shall be no mi stakes con cern in g their rea l

mean ings .

Whenever the word un i versal is u sed in !

re lati on to Life S oul o r M ind it implie s Un i

“
, ,

versal Spirit or G od When the term soul

.
!

o r individual soul is u sed it re fer s to di f

!
,

f e ren tiated spiri t which is expre ss e d in each

i ndividual human being By mind is implied
.

that pa rt Of us which pictu re s o r im age s al l

things an d a fterward s thinks re asons an d fo rm s
,

j udgments o f what i t has pictured M an s sense .

’

n a tu r e is th at p art o f hi s being which co rre

s pon ds to his fiv e sen se s through which h e

,

comes into closest contact with natu re Th e .

body is an expression O f soul an d mind an d , ,

s en s e I t i s a habita tion fo r the whole man

. ,

an d to a degree outwardly e xpres s e s h i m

, ,
.
14 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

While havi ng defin ed th e se difi eren t te rms

each as being distinct from the others l et it be ,

un derstood that they are al l va ryin g degree s

or difi eren tiation s o f th e O n e Univer sal Spirit — .

In God s great un i verse there are countless

’

vari eties o f parts but the re is n o s eparati on o r

,

detachm ent o f the parts from the whol e .

We us e term s to de fin e the difleren t de gree s

o f lif e an d i ts m anifes t ation s bu t Univ ersal ,

S pirit i s the all in all Unity p revails th rough .

ou t creat i on G od an d his m an ife s tation utterly

,

excl u ding anything an d everyt hin g that con

tradicts Creat or an d Creation .

lare but parts

Al of on e s tupen d
ous whol e,
Whose body n atu re i s, an d G od th e s oul
!
.

We lway s dealing with the power o f

are a

God an d the man ifestati on of that power ; an d

,

the power O f God is always and everywhe re

goo d Thi s then constitutes the great cen tral
.
, ,

fact O f bein g Under the heading O f Spirit

.
!
,

we w ould pu t Uni ver sal Life Love an d Inte l , ,

ligen ce Und e r th e h e ading of S oul or In !

.
,

dividu al iz ed Spirit we would put l ove fai th

!
, , ,

an d h o pe wi th all the di ff erenti ations p ro c ee d

,

in g from them Un der the heading o f M ind

!
.
,

we would pu t image th ought an d reason and , , ,

thei r difi eren tiation s Un der Physi cal .

 Defin ition f
o Terms I5

S en s e, we woul d pu t touc h , si ght , an d hearin g ,

with ls h eir m in o r difleren tiation s

‘
'

When I write o f conscious mi nd I mean ,

pres ent m ent al acti on that picture s or images ,

an d thinks an d r e a s on s con c e rn ing th os e men

ta l p i ctu re s When I refe r to subcon sc iou s

.

m ind I mean allthat reco rd O f the past allthe

, ,

thought pictures which the consciou s mind h as

c onc e i ve d from the time wh en it first began to
thin k In the subconscious mind i s pre served
.

e ve ry tho u gh t no matter how sm all ; thus s ub

,

consciou s mind fo rm s a record o f al lthat man

h a s though t o r done in th e pa st .

Thus i t will be e asy fo r the reader to unde r

stand under whi ch h eading an y degree or con
d i tion Of life app ear s .

Al l t ru e vibration s tarts from the cen te r O f

life f rom the spiri t o f lov e an d in its working
, ,

out , acts on both mind an d body Al l false .

v ib r ation origina te s on the s urface of life pro ,

d u cin g physica l an d m en tal disturb an c e s b ut ,

in n o way aff e c ting the inner life o f man only ,

a s it may Sh u t o ut fo r a ti me the co nsc i ou s re la

ti on o f mind to the source o f i ts bein g When .

I u s e th e term sen se v ibration I refer to that

!
,

e motional conditi on o f li fe produced by allthe

c ontradi cto rie s o f true feeling such as an ger, ,

malic e hate etc Th e t erm Atmospheri c o r

, , .

mi nd vib ration refers to mental a ction alon e

!
, ,
16 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

o r when the mind is drawing allits thought pic

tures from without an d is n ot bein g reinfo rce d
,

by i nne r fe el ing When the term etheric or

.

soul vib ration i s used it m ean s that the so ul

!
, ,

an d mind a r e at on e where i n l o ve an d wi sdo m

,

are in pe r fec t unison .

Janus the two faced god o f Rom an mythol

,
-

ogy was be liev ed t o be the j ani t or of hea v e n

, ,

and on e arth th e guardian de i ty Of gate s an d

door s Numa Pompil
. liu s call e d the firs t month
of the Roman ye ar after Jan u s and d edic at ed ,

a covered passage nea r the Fo ru m t o him Thi s .

passage con taine d a statue O f the god and h ad ,

two entrances which we r e always kept Open in

,

time of war and clos ed in time o f pe ace .

Whil e the Jan u s of mythology h as b een rel e

gated to Obli v ion and is no longer wo rshipe d
, ,

yet we find an exact co rre sponde nc e b etw ee n

the Roman deity an d the mind of man Th e .

human mind is the j anitor O f heaven and h as

th e keys o f th e doo r of earth M ind is th e .

s e rvant o f th e sou l an d master of the things

h ere bel ow . I t stand s between th e wo rld of
!

force on the on e hand and the wo rld of e x

, ,

pressi on on th e oth e r It is doubl e fac e d in that

.
-

i t h as th e power to unl ock th e gates of the inn er

li fe an d to sol ve the myste ri e s of the outer .

When both passage s are kept open i t rece i ves ,

on one hand an d gi ves on the other There i s .

 Defin i tion f
o Terms I7

an infl ux of life from the soul th at man i fests it

s elf in the world O f fo rm .

Life on this plane o f expression may be

li ken ed to a battle fiel d -
Th e kingd om of
.

heave n is taken by vi olen ce Through st ru ggl . e

an d s n flerin g i s man perfect ed ; thro ugh we ak

n e ss his po wer i s made man i fes t Now th e .

,

J an u s that sits midway in the passage must

s ee that both doo rways are kept open du rin g
the battl e so that he may rec e i v e light from
,

each .Th e exerc i s e o f certa i n quali ti es of mi nd

a re n e c e ssary i n o rder to succeed in th is Three .

great essenti als may be su mm ed up in three

word s : medita ti on co“ nt emplati on an d con cen
, ,

tration
f
.
f

( ) M editation is the en t erin g in t o th e ih

I

n e r consciousn e ss of li fe ; t he comm un i n g wi th

God ; the becoming on e wi th the et ern al S ource

an d Foun t o f life I t is purely subj ective d eal
.
,

i ng alone with the spiri tual si de o f bein g H ere .

the mind receive s its force an d power an d i s

a ct ed upo n by the cau se s O f life Life in all .
,

true meditation is on e Personality an d the

, .

myriad things of the outer w orld are l ost sight

o f ; the s pirit in man and the univer sa
l Spirit
blen d in th e unity of life so that God l ,
ives m
the life o f man and man li ves in the li fe o f Go d .

—
Bu t this inne r fo rce must fin d expres sion mu st
make i ts elf m an ifest ; an d the human min d he
18 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

come s the vehi cle for i t s man i festati on With .

th e forc e and power acquired in the in n er li f e ,

the passageway o f th e oute r world i s opened .

( )
2 T h e mind uses a nother fac u lty — con e en

tration — to make manifest that which i t h as re

ceived . Conc entration i s n eith e r force n o r
powe r ; yet wi thou t i t man cannot manife s t
, ,

e ithe r fo rce o r pow er in the outer wo rld Lack .

ing in conc en tration the mind dissipat e s t h e

,

fo rc e acqu ire d in the inne r worl d We may tak e .

a s u n glass and allow the rays of the s u n to pa s s

-

aiml e ssly through i t ; the forc e passe s th ro u gh

th e glass bu t produ ces no v isible mani fes tatio n .

When we b ring th e rays t o a focu s howeve r , ,

pow er b egins to manifest its elf Th e gl ass an d

.

the focu s a re not power but th ey se rve as mean s

,

by wh ich th e exp ression of fo rce b ec ome s a

visibl e reality ; in other words the invi sibl e pro
,

d u c e s it s action on the vi sib l e So with con

.

cen tration o f mind : o f i tself i t i s n eith e r,

powe r nor fo rc e ; but is th e vehicl e th r o u gh

which come s th e greatest exp re ssion of fo r c e
and pow er Conce ntration deals always with
.

th e obj e ctive ; i t concerns its elf with the thing s

o f th e o u t er wo rld.

( 3) T h e thi r d fa c ul ty is c o n t e mplation ,

which to a degre e un ites the other t wo f acu l

, ,

ti e s Contempl ati on may parta ke O f both inn er

.

an d out er imp res s i ons ; it is the con n e cting link

so A New H eaven an d a New E arth

li e s within the provi n c e o f man to pe rve rt it ,

and th rough s u ch perver si on to exp res s in a dis

co r dan t way th e things of life .

I shou l d s ay therefore to those des irin g to

, ,

d eve lop concentration of mind : seek ye firs t

th e kingdom of God and his righteousn e ss an d ,
!

conc ent ration ( with all other needed th in gs )

will b e add e d Th e kingdom of God i s foun d
.

in the wo rld of cau se Th e expressi on o f G od s

.
’

ki n gdom may be with ou t b u t th e powe r is

,

within Th e d es i re o f the mind should be th a t

.
,

it may have a g re at er rea lization of the po w e r

O f G od in its own life ; that it m ay be come th e

t rue s ervant of the so ul ; and tha t through com ,

ing in to u ch with th e inn er life forces an d -

knowl e dge acqui re d in th e wo rld of cau se it ,

may u s e the keys to u nl ock all the doors O f th e

o uter disclosing th e power it has rece i ve d fro m
,

within in su ch a way that its action shall b e

ben eficial in th e wo rl d withou t .

Again th ro u gh cont emplation and t rue men

,

tal image ry O f th e things O f the o u ter wo rld ,

th e mind b e come s c ent ered and us e s its f orce s

as n eed e d on th e e xt ernal plan e Whi le con .

c ent ration is not force it may b e said to con

,

s erve fo rce in s u ch a way that i t is not d is

s ipated b ut m ad e to accomplish its end an d p ur

po s e
.

In th e ev oluti on o f power so methi ng other

,
 Defin ition f
o Terms 21

th an the faculti e s already men ti on ed as si sts in

d ete rminin g wh eth er th e kn owledge acqui red
in the i nner world shall be exp res s ed outwardly
in part or in whole Th e t rue or the f alse acti on
.

o f wil lmust dete rmine this Will i s the great ex

.

e cu tive po wer of th e unive r se E very fac u lty of

.

mind and every organ of the body is d ependent

on the will . It makes its elf felt in everything th at
we d o As its forc e is di re cted a ri ght i t stre ngt h
.
,

en s b oth mind and b ody Th e mo re pow e rful

.

it becomes the mo re cha racter i s evolved M edi

, .

tation is the door to th e inn e r life ; conc ent ra

tion is the door to th e outer ; bu t will is th e very
fo rce O f life itself E nte ring by the in n er door
.
,

i t pas ses th rough the oute r .

G rea t as th e will undoubte dly i s howev er its , ,

t rue direction d e p e nds on our di vi n e in tel li

gence The re is a s pirit in man that guid es th e
.

a c tion of will ; h enc e in the individual s ou l this

, ,

facul ty conform s per fectly to th e l aw O f its exist

en ce when under gu idanc e o f the spirit O f

truth . Th e f re e dom and powe r of the will in ,

i ndi vidual life consists in its conformity to th e

“
,

l aw of God .Th e bondage and w eakn ess of the

come s ol O i t
' '

el
y th r u gh its be n g led by he
—
the world ch oo sing th e shadow of
M Jn p ! e ofi r
"

fi
!
f éfl y H w
'

referenc t i t e h o

runs may r each Th EFé Eré b ut tw o ways Th e

' ' '

will mus t choos e between them Th ere is no.

22 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

other altern ativ e Followi n g the true course

. ,

or willin g to be led by the l aw o f the s pi ri t o f

truth brings a consciou s recogn i tion o f our

,

un i on wi th allPower I t brings the realizati on

’

that we are one with the E n e rgy that b rought

us int o consciou s indi vidual exi stence ; th at th e
,

life o f man is not in any sen se s epa rate o r de

tach ed from G od ; an d that to kn ow God is
e te rn al l
ife an d power .

Th e terms m editation and con cen t rati on are

more fully expl ain ed elsewhe re but I will say
,

he re in s u mming up th at the first i s a me ans o f

acquiring po wer ; an d the s econ d is es s en tial to .

the u se of power .
 RELAT I VE UNDE RS TAND I NG
I n the beginning o f spiri tual devel opment
th ere s eems to be a tendency among m any pe o
pl e to lose sight o f the t ru e p roportion o f things ,

an d to exalt th e uni ve rsal to th e e xclu s ion of

th e indi vid ual In treating th e s ubj ect of mind

.

and spi rit as be ing al limpo rtant and counting

-
,

th e body as nothing they a re making a seriou s

,

mistake .

E verything in th e whol e universe is rel ated .

E ach thing is a part o f everything e l se . It is

n e ce ssa ry fo r u s t o und er stand the true rela
t ion and p roportion that exists b etween the part
and th e whol e o r o ur ide as concerning life may
,

b e com e wa rpe d and distorte d .

Whil e it is natural that the mind should be

c ent ere d to a fa r less d egre e upon the body
whe n it is whole and str ong and f re e from pain
and dis eas e n eve rth el e ss th e body d e mands a
,

c ertain amo unt o f p rop er attention It is th e

.

habitation that so u l has bu ild ed f or itsel f It .

re qui re d great intelligenc e to b ring it up to

i t s p resent d evelopm ent ; it requ i re d an eno r
mous amou nt O f en ergy to make it th e p er f e ct
23
24 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

—
machine that i t is more wonderful than an y
or all machines that the mind of man has been
able t o i nven t.

NO on e can expres s i n a perfec t way if th e

instrument O f expression i s not vib rating in
health an d st rength ; th erefo r e the body pl ay s
,

a most i mpo rtan t p art in the lif e of man as ,

through its right u s e must come all true exp r es

s ion. Th e mind can m ake it a fit instrumen t to
carry ou t its e v ery desi re ; bu t the mind can

als o so abuse the ins t rum ent that i t will be u n

able to fulfill i t s mission in life Th e bo dy mu s t

.

—
be prop e rly fed cloth ed an d cleans ed but thi s
,

—
is n ot enough it cannot be misused with im
p u n ity. E very ti me we giv e way to p a ssion s

we a re bringing a destructi ve force t o be ar upon

the physical organ i sm Allrightful us e o r u s e
.
,

whe rein the re is n o e xc e ss is strengt hening to

,

the body But when we use it to expre ss anger

.
,

hate or an y oth er ev il o r uncle an sta te of min d

, ,

we can n ot expect to get as good re s u lts fro m i t

a s if we had us e d it in a law f u l or d erly way , .

Th e body will be j u st wh at w e mak e it Al l .

true con scious me ntal action will p roduce well

,

direc ted physical acti on I t is unr easonable to

.

e xpect perfect health and strength o f body to

come from an unbalanced mind A mind tha t .

is at peace with its elf a mind that i s filled with

th e Optimi sm o f life is the one th at wi l l bri ng !
,

,
 Rel
ative Un ders tan din g 25

a bout true adj ustm en t between i tself and the

bo dy In the eff ort to supply our physical needs
.
,

al lunconscious of what we are doing we often ,

b ri ng ab ou t bodily disturban ce . Sometimes we

allow our minds to be com e anxious as to h ow

we shall feed and clothe our bo di e s an d thi s

,

wrong thought process n ot only robs us of th e

-

en e rgy to p rocure what th e b ody needs but if ,

the Opportunity aris e s for us to use physical

means fo r the acquisition Of th e nec e ssary food
an d clothing th e bo dy is un e qu al to its task
, .

It is su rprising the small amount of foo d the

body can exist upon i f th e mind is at re st We .

allow ou r minds t o becom e st rain e d an d ten se

in t rying to wo rk out som e plan of life which

we think would make for th e welfare Of the
body ; the m ental tension produce s tension of
the brain n e rve an d muscl e and we injure the
, ,

body far more th an w e should have b en efited

it if our plan had b een put into e xecution E ve ry
.

mental exc e ss l eave s its ma rk upon th e physical

organism I t is un natural that t h e bo dy Should
.

eithe r be sick o r dis e as e d

. Th e sickn e ss or dis
ease do e s n ot come b e caus e Of foo d or t h e lack
o f i t but because of the way in which the mind
,

i s constan tly abusing th e bo dy .

Wh en the mind und e rstands it s true rel ation

to th e physical o rganism knows that it is the
,

m aste r i t wi ll th en t reat its s ervant in a more

,
26 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

kindly way Then the body will not be abu s ed

.

o r gi v en over to any kind Of excess I t willb e .

.

us e d in a thoroughly natu ral way t o expres s

all th e t ru e thoughts an d feelings in the li fe o f
man to fulfill allt rue requirements in the m in d
,

o f man .

Th e body Of man i s not to be i gn ore d We .

must recogniz e its tru e place in li fe Someti me .

,

th e body will repres en t man that is the real , ,

man ; the man of h eart an d the man Of mind ;

th e tho roughly pois e d repre s enta tiv e Of G od '

upon earth .

E xt re m e u n s el
fis h n es s or s e lf abn e gation is
'

just as inj u rious as th e othe r extrem e wou l d b e .

Let m e il l ust rate I t wi ll O f t en b e f ound t hat

.

the e ff ect of on e per son s ext re me un s el

’
fis h n e s s
is t o make oth ers mo re s elfish Pe opl e who g o .

to an extrem e o f un s el fis h n es s think that th ey

are doing th e wi l l o f th e H igh e st I f th e y .

would but an alyze thei r own thoughts and f ee l

ings th ey woul d find a selfish motiv e to b e th e
cause of thei r u n s el fis h n es s A n y ca u s e m u st
.

Of n e ce ssity produ ce an e ff e ct Simi l a r to th e

caus e and if through th ei r un s el
,
fis h n e s s oth ers
—
b ecom e mo re s elf indu lgent d evel op w e akn e s s
-

O f cha ract e r o r p e rhaps ty ran n y and c ruel ty

,

the n there is n o natural con dition existing in

th e S O calle d uns e lfish mind that can p rod u ce
-

such unnatu ral re sults .

28 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

not last In its place it is o f exceedin g

th e .

an d h e lp j us t as n ece ss a ry as the al t rui s tic s ide

,

of man s nature whi ch he feel s an d expres s es

’
,

lat e r on .

Al l selfishn e ss in the first pla ce or the con ,

side ration of the self is n ot essen tially or n eces

,

sa ril y e vil T h e k n owledge

. an d in t ere st th at
are li mited t o the purely pers onal s elf are just
as e ssenti al an d useful in th e ir place as th e
gre at er and d eep er kn owl edge an d the wider
sympa thies that come late r in indi vidual de vel
opmen t Only as we le arn to understan d ou r
.

s elve s do we have any t rue unders tan ding of

ou r re lationship to God or man G od is to ea ch .

and all of us j ust What we m ake H im ju st as ,

each conc ei ve s H im to be To the t ruly en .

lighten e d mind God is l ove ; to the highly de

,

vel oped in tel le ctual mind G od is principle or ,

l aw ; and to still other minds God stan ds f o r a ,

per sonality capabl e of manife sting both lov e an d

ange r Th e high e st conc ept ion Of God m u st
.

always come from th e Go dl ike side o f man ,

n eare st to th e soul consciousness When we .

feel the spirit o f l i f e and love working throu gh

us we say i t is Go d Thi s is why w e Shou l
, . d
—
s ee k fo r the God within u s this is why the in
divid u al s e lf should reach out towar d th e Un i
ve rsal S el f .

Th e same law holds t ru e in our e stimat e o f

 Rel
a tive Un ders tan di n g 29

others We see in them allthat we understan d

.
,

in o urs elves I t w ould be difli cul

. t t o fin d two
p e opl e who are on exactly th e same plan e Of
d evel opm en t and because o f thi s it is hard for
,

u s to kn ow the m otiv e behi n d the action of an

other We see the characte r Of oth ers through

.

o u r own ; th erefore we must first unde rstand

o urs el ves b e fore we can hope to have an y j ust
concep t ion o f our b r oth e r man H ence our
.

c r iti cism s o f oth er s a re real ly only criticisms of

o urselve s our condemn ation of othe rs is a con
,

d emn ation of our o wn sel ve s our forgi v en e ss

,

o f oth e r s i s in simple t ruth a forgiven ess of

ourselves .

But so me may say the tre e is kn own by i ts

, ,

frui ts That is t rue but What in r eality is the

.
,

frui t o f any cha racter or any life ! Take the

fruit at on e stage an d it is ha rd bitter so ur ;
, , ,

a n d yet at a l ater s tage the fruit having become,

ripen ed is good both to see an d to taste

, .

The r e a re s o man y things to be take n into

c onsideration in the j udgment of an other life :
the en viron men t th e outwa rd p re ssu re Wh o
— .

can say that he would not ha ve don e o r l e ft un

do ne un d e r th e same ci r cumstanc e s things tha t

, ,

occu r in anoth e r man s life ! Again w e a re not

’

a lw ay s c o nsciou s of what all th e circumstan c e s

were that s urrounde d the individual whom w e

j udge fo r we can only s ee them from th e out
,
30 A New H eaven an d a New Earth

side wh ile the other see s them from wi thin .

An d s o ou r judgm ent of others is la rgely a was te

of time and en e rgy We can not s ee clea rly or
.

de eply enough to j udge justly Th e es sen tial .

thing is to truly unde rstand ourselves to rea lize ,

som ething of the principl e in volved i n ou r ev ery

action b e i t small or great At some time
, .

in life eve ry on e will hav e to fin d th is to be

true .

At stage in ou r developmen t ou r i dea s of

on e

right and w rong wil l di ff er greatly from the

id eas w e hol d about th e sam e things at an other
stage Things which w e onc e consid e red g ood
.

wi ll appe a r fa r b elow th e standa rd w e n ow h old

fo r th em and th at which was once evil in ou r
,

eye s we may l ater und erstand to b e only goo d in

,

—
its immatu r ity goo d in the making E ve n th e .

positi ve p re se nt good may have b een a t on e

,

time too b road and fa r re aching p erhaps to h a ve

-

b een und erstood by us in an ea rli er stage o f ou r

d evelopme nt O u r plane of consciousn e ss is
.

constantly chan gi ng ; that is the plane Of men ,

tality ; th e sou l n ever change s On th e me ntal .

plan e how ever everything is relativ e W e ta lk

, , .

of the u ltimate but we reall y do not know o f

,

what w e speak O ur id eas of p erfection a re

.

on ly relati ve Th e blossom may be pe rf e ct o f

.

its kind yet th e fruit is a still great er d eve lop

,

ment from the blo s som We a re p er fect to .

 R el
a tive Un ders tan din g
day i f we are t rue to to day s ideals ; bu t the
,
-
’

id eals Of yes terday are n ever large en ough for

th e ideals Of to day It is only wh en we fall
-
.

short of our id eals that w e sin Reli gi on must .

b e in us a contin uous growth We must have .

c onstantl y n e w and high e r conc epts Th ere can .

b e no fina lity Th e more w e st udy th e t ru th

.
,

th e la rge r b e come s our m en tal ho rizon an d th e ,

high e r ou r id e als One of our chi e f troubles is

.

that w e a re t oo apt to get only on e littl e angl e

of a t ru th and forget that there a re numberl e ss
,

oth ers just a s worthy Of consid e ration .

Wh en w e s e e oth er peopl e satisfie d in b eli e fs

that s eem cont rary to ou r s w e think th eir con ,

ce ption mus t th erefor e b e false Usually th e .

t ruth conc e rning th e matte r is that n either ou r

id eals no r their ide als are untrue but that both ,

a re pa rtial We shoul d not try t o uphold on e

.

p rincipl e to the exclu sion o f all othe rs or Of ,

any oth er ; th ere is good in all and th e p er fe ct ,

whol e has n ee d of al l Al lt hat a man can hop e

.

to b e c om e is w r itt e n from a lle t e rnity into th e

const itu tion of his b eing .

Th e facto r o f choic e com e s in in consci ousl y

willing t o work in accordanc e with th e Uni
ve r sal Will H ere we have th e vital t ru ths in
.

th e seemingly opposing p rincipl es of prede stina

tion and f re e wil l Th e real the f ree will is
.
,

the Will O f the Univ ersal I t is through such .

32 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

seeming opposi tes that we get n ea rest to the

n e c e ssa ry tru th E ither extreme would lea ve
.

us ou t of balance It i s in the un ion of th e two

.

that we find the golden m ean of t ruth To be .

tru e to ones elf is th e b e ginning o f all tru th ;

yet anoth er may advis e or admonish an d th us ,

prove h elpful to us We may gain much h el

. p
from th e expe ri e nce o f others but the fin alau ,

th ority Of life com e s fro m Within one s o wn

’

s oul Anothe r may formulat e the law for us ;

.

n eve rth el e ss be fo re it can be come l

, a w to u s or ,

hol d any authority ove r us we our se lve s must ,

kn ow th e law working in the life O therwi se .

ou r l i ving would b e pu rely automati c we b e

ing li ved rather than living
, .

Never accept in th e s ens e o f appropria ti n g

,

ready ma d e anyon e else s opinion If we can

-
,
’
.

not ou rs elve s d emonst rat e a t ruth then it is n ot ,

’

truth fo r us It may b ecome so on the mo rrow

.
,

but it is not so to day This is t ru e conc e rn in g

-
.

—
everything h ealth success or happiness ; un til
,

a t ru th is born e in upon us an d awaken s a

re sponse of its own in us it is n ot really o u rs , .

Knowl e dge that n ever bec om e s tho roughly as

s imil ated is n ot Wisd om I t only s erves to make
.

us unhappy ; we f eel a great s ens e of respon s i

bil ity and of cond emnati on unl e ss we put i n to ,

ou r life an d p r actice th e kn owl e dge that h as

come to us Neith e r our mental nor ou r physi

.
 Rel
ative Un ders tan din g 33

cal mu scle s grow strong un le ss they are i n con

s tan t u se.

Th e u n i on o f love an d wisd om m ust of n eces

s ity gi ve birth to ac tivi ty We can n ot s it still
.

w i th our han ds folde d an d thi n k ou t an ything ,

an d through such thi n k ing bec om e wis e It is

.

through experien ce and ac ti on that t rue wis

dom comes . To give full expres s ion to th e in
n e r life — to be outwardly what we are at the
—
cente r this is to bring the Ki ngdom o f God
down to e arth to come into th e kingdom o f the
,

g reat e r self t
, o be on e with th e s o u l o f th i ng s
beyond the limi ts Of the person al s elf .

A New Te stam en t wri t er poin ted ou t the

fact that a man cannot lov e Go d an d ye t hate
h is b ro th e r ; tha t i t would b e impo ssible for an y
on e t o lo v e the whole an d hate any part We .

can s ee then that th e lo v ing of G od first comes

th rough s elf love l ate r lo v e o f o ther s and las t

-
, ,

o f allthere c omes th e pe rfect love which em

brac e s e ve ryth ing in Go d s g reat univers e Th e
’
.

mea sure o f our love fo r ou r neighbor is th e

mea sure of our love for ou rs elve s We sh ould .

n ever be satisfied with this self lo v e -

or even
,

with our love f or tho se n ea rest an d de arest who

give us l ove in retu rn We should re ach out to
.

al l peopl e an d thin gs : only as we love d o we

grow I t is not so much the love that com e s to
.

us a s the lo v e we are a ble to give t o o th ers that

34 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

helps u s to ris e to a still h igher plan e o f b ein g .

It i s th e spi rit of love in u s that m akes us on e

with al lthings .

It is n ot by an y m en ta l proce ss that we dis

cern the thi ngs of the Spi rit but by the spi rit ,

that dwells Within us Each s oul in some meas

.

u re expresses God because each i s a part o f th e

,

w hole ; each soul or th e s um o f all souls i s n ot

, ,

God bu t is on e with G od in the sens e that a ray

,

o f s u nligh t is one with the s un I t h as its b e .

ing in th e sun and can never become sepa ra t ed

,

o r d e tach e d from t he sun ; and ye t we can d i f

f eren tiate bet w e en th e sun an d the ray I n th e .

body of man may b e found every cons ti tu e nt

part of th e physical uni ve rs e ; y et which o f u s
would v en ture t o say My body is the wh ole
uni vers e Ju st i n like manner we are one with
the So u l of the uni vers e but that does not mak e
,

—
us G od rath er on e with God .

Th ere comes a tim e in th e life of man wh en

th e l e tting go of on e s p ersonal life i s the o n ly
’

way to the fullest re alization of a la rge r li fe ;

but w e n ever b egin with thi s We grow in an .

o rderly way w e t ak e on e step at a tim e we

, ,
’

mo unt one plane aft e r anoth e r until at last th e ,

indi vidual li fe becom e s lost we might say in , ,

the great Universal Life I t i s essential to o u r

.

own w el l being as w el l as th at of oth e rs that in

-
, ,

the be ginning w e Sh ould deal ju s tly with our

 TH E PSYCH I C PLANE

E ach o f the various stage s of human de

vel opmen t holds something in the n a tu re of a

surpris e ; eve ry stage b rings wi th it something

n ew s om ething we may say that has not be en
, , ,

anti cipat e d .If the development has followed

along n at u ral or o rd erly lines th e r e will b e l e s s
,

Occasi on for su rprise than if on e had p roduced

abnormal growth in on e di rect ion while the re st
,

o f his life had b een largely n egle ct ed .

Perhaps th e re is n o one plan e of life fill ed

wi th m o re surp rise s than that which w e call th e
Psychic .It is s o ha rd to account fo r th e many
an d varied expe ri enc es which people pass
through hardly an y two people ha ving e xactly
,

the same exp e ri enc e Th e psychic pl an e t e

.

s embl e s the mat erial plane i n that i t has v ery

la rgel —
y to do wi th Seeing and hea ring th e S ee
i ng o f things an d the hea ring of sounds that are
not seen an d h ea rd by th e g reat mass o f h u
manity Doubtl ess at som e on e time or an other
.
,

almos t every p e rs on h as an experi ence which he

considers weird an d u n accountable bu t t he se

,

experi ences are few and far b etween It is very.

36
 Th e Ps ychi c P l
an e 37

d ifi eren t with the call e d p sychic Some liv e

s o-
.

quite as much on thi s plan e as they do on the

mate rialplane an d usu ally they a r e torn by the
,

conflicti ng thoughts and d e si res of both planes ,

s o t hat th ey ge t li ttle happiness or pe ace of m i n d

from on e pl an e o r the othe r .

E ve rything in th e nature o f abn o rm al dev elo p

ment should be avoided on any plane of life , ,

b u t the re is no one pl ane o f being which brings

a s much disturb an c e in t o hu man life a s the

psychic pl ane when d evelopment h as b een of an

,

u n n atu ral orde r and the re is no one plane le ss

,

un de rstood M any peo pl e are often de ce iv e d

.

i nto beli eving that abnormal psychic d evelop

men t mean s spiritu ality while othe r s look upon
,

i t an d its man i fe stat ions as b eing the plan e and

the wo rks of th e dev il Wh at i t may b e to us
.

dep en ds on wha t we brin g to i t I f w e b ring .

to it men tal po ise an d a desire for knowledge ,

f or the accomplishm e nt of goo d ends and pur

poses then we shall fin d that psychic d evelop
,

m en t will be o f the greatest p rofit ; but if we

a re led through curiosity or if we a re n ega
,

tivel y se n s it ive w e, shall h ave many an d vari e d

un plea san t experi enc e s .

What we term th e psychic plane of to day may -

in a f ew generations b e no longer th e psychic

plan e becau s e as evoluti on continues in life in
, ,

n er th in gs b e co me man ife sted in an ou ter way ,

38 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

an d when this man i festation take s pl ac e th en ,

that which was psychi c is p sychic n o lo nger .

A careful i nvesti gati on will Show that the Some

thi n g which we call color as well as the h ar
,

mony of s ounds has been a gradual evolut ion

,

i n the li fe o f man ; that th e harmony o f color

an d s ounds was firs t an inner appreciati o n o r ,

a psychic c on d iti on which a fte rward s foun d ex

,

pre ssion in th e outer world An d thi s took pla ce

.

b e cause as man learns to feel an d think in a

,

highe r way he establishes Within himself highe r

,

rate s of vibrati on an d bec ome s attun ed t o un i

,

v ersal vibration s and is aff e cted by them

, .

Th ere is n o qu esti on whatever but that th e

kn owledge o f color is a development i n the li fe
o f man an d there can be n o qu e s ti on bu t th at
,

the harmony o f sound in som e master compo si

t i on if app reciated and unde rstoo d by th e li s
,

tener is also because o f th e development th at

,

has taken place within him Th e great composi

.

tion i s the inner vision of the compose r Using .

note s t o interpret that inn er vi sion we later ,

fin d its m an i festation th rough v oi ce o r in s tru

men t .

So it is wi th everything i n l i fe Th e n or .

mally d eveloped psychic s ee s an d hears th at

which oth ers are unable to se e o r hea r I f h e .

h as pow e r o f expression th en h e t ries to t e ll in

, ,

one way or anoth e r th rough the medium of th e

,
 Th e Ps ychic P l
an e 39

brush the chi s el th e pen o r som e other way

, , , ,

som ething of h is visi on to the world ; the world

ha ving ente red i nt o an appreci ati on o f it the ,

psychic thing b ec omes no longer psychic Th e .

wo rld to day is fill e d wi th mat e rial things that

-

onc e we re only psychic dre ams an d as man ,

continu e s to unfold hidden powers and pos

ities poten tial within him his e ach and cv
s ib il ,

e ry d re am wi ll b ecome re aliz ed in form There .

is nothing hidden th at Shall n ot be reveal ed .

, ,
—
Th e t rue psychic th en is th e pi on ee r th e
on e who goes o ut into the unkno wn cou nt ry to

explo re and di scover in o rde r that he may

,

make this country a habitabl e one for oth er s

who follow But the abnormal psychic o r the
.
,

on e wh o e n ter s this re al m without thought or

pu rpose is on ly going to b ring discou ragem ent

,

to hims el f as w ell as to other s b ecaus e his re

, ,

po rts will b e pa rtial o r incompl ete H e is n o .

t rue explo rer who enter s th e n e w realm with

o u t guid e or compass ; ha v ing no gi ve n purpos e ,

his mind is fixe d on no particula r end b u t wan ,

d ers helpl e ssly and hop ele ssly in many cas e s , ,

a n d longs to ge t b a ck to wh e re h e wa s b e fo re

th e psychic que st b egan .

There is n o t ruth so great that i t cann ot be

prosti tut ed to a wrong end and the gre at e r the
,

t ruth
, the gre at e r th e p rostitution and th e ,

psychic who gets hold O f things f rom the w r ong

40 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

en d, will be able to impart an ything that is

n ot

healthy o r whole some t o another inquirin g min d .

There i s a psychic condition o f clear seein g an d -

clea r heari ng wherein one sees an d hears that

-
,

whi ch others are unable to perceive O n e may .

desi re t o give a co rrect repo rt of al

lhe has s ee n
o r heard but only to a degree is this po ssible a s
, ,

the psychic in o rder to make hi s discove ri e s

,

clear to other min ds must be able to d raw som e

,

an alogy from the ext e rn al worl d Now b e .

,

cause that which is un expressed i s greater than

that which i s expres sed there mu st always be an
,

element o f newnes s that will defy an y an al ogy

that on e may a ttempt to make with things on th e
physical plan e Take a s an ill u stration an ele
.
, ,

men tal man who h as dev eloped only to th e de

gre e where he can se e red an d orange the two ,

first col o rs o f the spect rum Then le t us s up

.

po se an oth e r el emen tal man wh o is able to per

ceive the color green ; h ow co uld h e through an y

spoken word be able to impart his knowledge to

the man wh o s aw only red and orange ! Such
a d is c overy w ould h ave to wait f or the oth e r

man s development to a time when h e could s ee

’

and appreciate the n ew c ol o r .

An d this i s the way th at development h as

gone on gen eration after generation the pio ,

n e ers being able t o impart to th o se less deve l

op e d than themselv e s only a littl e o f th e

 Th e Psychic Pl
an e 4 !

won der wh i ch they were able to perceive an d ,

later cam e th e kn owledge or developmen t to

th e man y .

Th e p sychic wo rld th en is ever becomi ng

, ,

man ifest ever di sclo sing somethin g n ew which

, ,

in turn s ee ms to b ecome materi al ; a s wh en we

l oo k at the gras s an d calli t green and the sky ,

an d ca ll i t blue believing both gre e n an d blue

,

to be somethin g ext ernal to ou rs e lves An d yet.

there was the time when some one man o r men

m ade the di scovery within them selves o f these
col o rs an d la t e r tran sferred them to the world
,

exte rn al to themselves Thro ugh the proc e ss

.

o f evolu tion one great octave of sound and

,

color h as been disclo sed ; through the proces s

o f evolution there will come th e di s covery o f

anoth e r great octave which will not only in

,

cl u de al lthat has take n plac e in the octave b e

l ow, bu t will be mathematically doubled b e ,

caus e each n ot e ou any oc ta ve of being dou bl es

its rate s o f vi brati on on the n ext oc tave abov e .

There are many people wh o see colors gen e rally ,

wi th eyes cl os ed but som etimes wi th open eye s

, ,

that are like though un like an y on e o f the

, ,

seven colors There i s usually an intensity a

.
,

brillian cy an d a depth in the color that th ey

h ave never befo re fo un d in the prismatic col o rs .

To people wh o are unfamili ar with s u ch ex

p e rien ce s such se e ing might se e m to b e mor e i l
42 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

lu sory th an a dream but the l arge number o f

,

oth erwise tru thful people wh o t estify to t he

t ru th o f such seeing cannot be disc redited b e ,

cau s e othe rs are not yet ready to app re cia t e

what they have s een an d what to som e de gr e e , ,

they a re able to impart

‘

We kn ow that beyond the bright v iol et col o r ,

v ibrations continue We know too that knowl

.
, ,

edge of colo r has b een a gradu al developm e n t

in h uman life s o that the re is n othing u n rea s
,

on ab le in th e s tat em e nts mad e by many p e ople

that th ey hav e seen s u ch colo r s We mu st re .

membe r that th er e is an inn e r s eeing and an in

n er h earing which w i tho ut do ubt is a g re at e r
facto r in h uman existe nce than w e have h er e
to fore beli eve d I am o f th e opinion that no
.

v ery great time will elapse b e fo re colors wh ich

a re now se en psychically will become a part o f
ou r o uter v isibl e seeing as n e w n otes in a high er
,

octave of col or .

Aga in as regards hearing the e a r that is ,

highly attu ned to the ha rmoni e s of sou nd Often

catch e s both high and low sou nds that the o r
d in ary ea r is n o t attu n e d to H e a ring th en
.
, ,

m u st be fi rst o f al l a psychic condition fo r the ,

sou nd wave s may st rik e alike on th e drum s o f

the ea r s of two indi vidu als and yet one may get
,

a hund re d or a thou sandfold m ore of th e har

moni e s from s u ch v ib rati ons than th e other .

44 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

ical freedom Figurati vely speaking i n t o each

.
,

person s hands has been c ommitted the full ca re

’

an d p ro tect i on of his wh ole life but i f o ne ah ,

dicates such po wer o r allow s an other t o u s urp

,

it then to a marke d degree they have interfer ed

,

with their own natural development While al l .

life is on e life and while we are members on e

,

o f an othe r n e v erthel e ss the law require s of cv

, ,

e ry individual that h e shall wo rk out to its full

n ess and compl e teness al l that has been writ
ten into his own life and a re fu sal on the part
,

of the indiv idual t o do thi s will not only retard

his natu ral d evelopme nt but brin g so rrow an d ,

pain in its wake .

M an i s a m e dium through which God work s ,

but no individu al man should be a mediu m

through which someone else works an d any ,

thing that savo r s o f cont rol on the part of on e

indi v idu al to a ff ect anoth er usurp s th e universa l ,

cont rol and is fille d with dan ger n ot only to

, ,

th e one controll e d but also to the one who con

,

trol s Again I say that freedom is ab solu tely

.

e ssential to indi vidu al growth an d develop

men t ; othe rwise that whi ch i s n o rmal in th e
begi n n in g become s abno rmal o r cont racted an d
rest ri cted in its growth .

S uggestion is a po wer whi ch u sed in a n a t , ,

ural way i s a means by which people may de

,

rive much ben efit ; but the s uggestion th at i s

 Th e Psychic Pl
an 45

n ot true, su ch as a den ial of sin or disease or

p a i is fal se sugges tion made to th e min d by

n ,

o n e s own s el f or by an yon e el se Su ch sug

’
.

g es t ion w ill d o gr ea t er ha r m th a n g o o d be c a u se ,

b e fore a s ugge stion can be o f an y value it must ,

p ic tu re the thi n g it sugge s ts an d t his m e n,ta l

p icture be c o m in g s ub co n sc i o us per p e t ua t e s i t
se lf ih the min d n o t on ly o f the on e wh o gi ves
,

the su gge stion but the on e wh o recei ves it

, .

E very sugges ti on then must be filled with

, ,

t ru th in o rder to produce a good res ult .

Again a sugges tion ma de tha t i s in the n a

,

ture o f a c ompulso ry o ne wher e the on e giving ,

th e suggestion forc es or wills the other pe rson to

accept i t is no t natu ral in that it in terf e re s with
, ,

th e oth e r s fre edom an d in so far as any cause

’

i s un n atural the efi ect must be un n atural too

, , .

In all sugges tion we must consider its eff e ct

, ,

n ot o nly on the c on s ci ous but al so on the s ub ,

c on sciou s min d for whil , e the sugge stion may

se em in gly hav e bu t a momen tary e ff ect on the
c on sci ous min d its acti on i s o f a far mo re per
,

m an en t n ature on the subconsci ous A true .

s ugge s tion from an other min d may brin g un told

g oo d to the o ne receiv i ng it o r a false o ne

, d o
m u ch harm A Suggesti on rein forced by a
.

com pulso ry or hypn oti c suggesti on in ove r ,

ri din g we migh t say the wil

, , l o r the mind of
an oth er cau s e s th e s ubj e ct s mi n d firs t of all t o
’

,
46 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

become centered on the suggestion as made by

th e operator . Later the suggestion calls up
,

f rom th e s ubconsci ous min d a thous an d other

suggestions that a re in some way related to th e
fi r st suggestion but the mind o f the subj e ct is
,

really a blan k a s regards ev erything else bu t

the o riginal s ugge stion and allth e suggestion s
a ss ociat e d with i t that come pou ring up fro m

th e subc onsci ous mind One should be able to

.

se e that this is n ot a n atu ral or de r o f thin gs

that it is not m ental conc ent ration in the true
sense o f the word b eca use i n t rue m ental con
,

c ent ration th e mind can instan tly pass i f it ,

wishe s from the thing i t is en gaged in do ing

, ,

t o som e oth er nec e ssary thin g ; while s uch i s

not th e cas e unde r th e controlled suggestion o f
s om eon e els e B e ca u se such suggestion i s ab uo r
.

mal i t cannot p rodu c e no rma l r e sults

, .

Al ld evelopm e nt th e n m u st foll ow alon g n at

, ,

u ra l o r orderly l ine s ; the mind Should be free

to recei ve suggestions an d act upon them bu t ,

no mi nd Should ever be compelled by an y other

mi nd to re ce i v e sugge stion and act upon it .

Th e int egrity of each and eve ry mind mu s t b e

respected i f w e would ha v e th e i ntegrity o f our
,

own minds resp ected Som e may u rge th at th e

.

goo d accomplishe d through such sugge stion wi ll

fa r ou tweigh any ha rm but l e t i t b e und ersto od
,

that the re is a natural law of suggesti on wh i ch

 Th e Ps ychic Pl
an e 47

is m ore efi ective, beca u se it i s true than i s th e ,

abno rmal m ethod o f will ing an other to do as

y o u wish him t o do .It will alway s be fou n d
that natural method s wi ll gi ve n atural results ;
that will p rove fa r more satisfactory than an y
r e s u lts obtain e d in an abno rmal way .

Th e psychic i s ofte n s poken o f as the sen s i

tiv e Th e sen siti v e pers on i s like a high ly at
.

t un e d instrumen t that when the tun ing fork

, ,

starts u p certa i n v ibrations the in strumen t re

,

s pon ds to those v ibrations giving ba ck vibra

,

t ions of its o wn ; while an other inst rument n ot

S O highly attu n e d give s back no respo ns e We .

a re bathed in a limitles s oc ean of vibrati on but ,

w e a re allu nconscio u s sav e to a comparati vely

,

s ma ll part o f this ocean and w e re spond to that

, ,

part because we hav e b e com e gradu ally attun e d

,

t o it through inner vibration ; but as evolution

con tin ues in lif e the re wi ll come an eve r wi d
,

e n in g fi eld o f kn o wl e dge and th at which is n u

,

h ea rd an d un s ee n to day in a n ea r gene ration

-
,

wi l l be both seen and heard .

Th e psychic realm is the b o rd e rland which in

te rven es b e twee n th e vi sible and the invi sible .

I t is a realm that is op en to some b ut cl os ed to ,

other s ; it is a realm that some ente r th rough

the gateway of an orderly development b ut i t is ,

also a real m wh e re some scale the walls or at

tai n an entran ce through oth er than natural
48 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

methods Th e one wh o forces his way in to th e

.

undi scovered c o unt ry d oes so at h is own peril ;

,

he i s not going to fin d i t a h aven o f re st b ut ,

on e wherein he wi ll m eet w i th many an d t ryi n g

expe rience s To many i t is dith cul

. t to realize
that there i s a n atural lawful orderly way in
, ,

all devel opmen t an d that on ly as thi s cou rse

,

is pu rsu e d can on e hope to be in harmon ious

adjustmen t with his environ men t .

Th e p sychi c m us t realize th at on ly as min d

an d so ul learn to vi brate i n ha rmony wi th U ni

vers al S pi rit can H eaven or h armon y be at

ta in ed .

Th e psychic realm is also open to all who

seek it by l awful m ean s an d to such it is a ,

realm of progres s o f enlighten men t an d a

, ,

p rophecy o f greater dev el opm en t to come Let .

n o on e h ow ever be d e ce i v ed into thin ki ng th at

, ,

the psychic realm is a plan e o f th e highest spirit

u ald evelopment .I t i s rather tha t w orld which
li e s j ust a l ittl e beyond our phy sical Sen se s b ut ,

on e in wh i ch much k r Iowledge ca n be ga in ed

i t is not however the great Spiritual plan e o f

, ,

feeling where all the j oy an d love an d fai th

,

have thei r sou rce Neverth el e ss i t mu st b e

.
,

viewed as a m an ife stati on from th e source of

—
life a d qui te as real even mo re real than th e
, n —
outer world in whi ch man l i ves .

Th e psychi c pl an e i s a wo rld fille d w i th p lan s

 Th e Ps ychic Pl
an e 49

an d i deal s but wheth e r the plan s an d i deals origi

,

n a t e solely from m ind s li vi ng in the mo re phys

i cal fo rms of thi s ea rth or eman ate f rom

min ds in the Fourth Dimen si on is n ot certain ;
it may be a un ion o f both n e vertheless the i deal
, ,

o r pl an is first p s ychic an d late r is a pp ro pri at ed

b y difi eren t in di vi duals an d gi ven fo rm on

ea rth .

To il lustrate I was acquainted wi th a famou s

,

in ven to r wh o told me that he saw between th e

s leepin g an d the waking states o f con sci ousn ess ,

a lmos t every in v en tion co mplet ed , Be fore h e

e ver h ad an y i dea o f t he thin g wh i ch he after

wards pe rfected in f o rm . I t is a well kn own -

f a ct that in n early al lgreat in ven tion s i t will ,

b e foun d that a numbe r of peo ple i n difi eren t

p ar ts o f the wo rl d h av e be en s ecre tl y w o rking to

in vent s ome particular ma chine that h ad; so

man y th in gs in c ommon that on e mi ght well
h ave though t that they h ad ta lked o r pl anned to
g e th e r w
,h en j us t t he r ever s e o f this w as rea lly
true Th e world o wes u sually the conception
.

to the d ream er an d th e prac tical man gives

,

fo rm to th e dream Th e dreams o f on e gene ra

.

tion or age bec ome the r e aliz ati on o f th e next .

Th e dreamer en ter s th e p sych i c plan e and h is ,

min d becom es filled with the visions to b e foun d

there ; thin kin g an d ta lkin g o f them a fte rwa rd s ,

h e may impress the mi nds o f oth e rs an d the se ,

5 0 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

others may actualize or gi v e fo rm to som ething

that he h as pe rcei ved in an in ner world o f
vision.

When there is a pe r si stent deman d made by

a number O f people for an inv ent ion that will
facilitate m ental or physica l p rogre ss then t o ,

such a demand the r e com es in th e near fu tu re

som e answ er At the pre sen t time this ci vi liz e d
.

world as a whole is demanding the c onque st of

th e ai r as a mean s t o travel as man i s able t o
,

t ravel on wate r o r on the earth, and b e cause

such a d emand has b e en made the time will n ot
,

be long befo re the ai r Ship wil l ha ve it s com

-

mercialv al u e and people will be travelin g more

,

rapidly and as safely as it is possibl e for th em

to do o n st e amships and rail roads at th e p res ent .

It is only a few yea rs ago that th e gre at e st

sci entists said that no machin e h eavi e r than the
ai r could be i nvented that wo uld be able to fly
,

th rou gh the ai r Al lthis has bee n disp roved

. .

We a re gradu ally c oming to s ee that whatever

man desi re s th ere i s a lawful and orderly way
,

o f attai n ing to the fu lfill me nt of s u ch desire .

I ha ve said before that whatev e r on e b rings

to th e psychic plan e that is what it will be come
,

to him Th e in ventor whose mind is abso rbed

.

and w rappe d u p in the de si r e to invent will be ,

mo re than rewa rde d by a clea rer insight and a

bette r kn owl edge o f the inven tions h e is tryin g
5 2 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

tin u ou s act from lower to higher con s ci ou s nes s ,

f rom u nseen substance to conc rete form .

H e aven awaits the harmonizi ng o f all en ergy .

O n e soul o ut o f harm ony with the di vi ne plan ,

retards t o a degree the realization of all human

ity as all part s must vib rate in sympath eti c
,

harmony m ust bec ome on e with Univ e rsal Life

, ,

Love an d Wisd om Th e t rue psychic shoul d

.

be the pioneer to help in fin ding and di recting

others i n the way o f life .

There is g rave danger h owever to the sen

, ,

sitive wh o is n egati ve ly i n clined in s ee ki n g to

acquire kn owledge o f t his plane wi thout the
,

moti ve for su ch kn owl e dge is of the highest or

der Curiosity may be gratifie d at the expen se
.

o f sanity ; wh eth e r i t be th ro u gh th e Obs e ssion

o f an entity or th e Obs ession of ideas i s n ot ma

teris lto o ur point but if it un fits on e f or s elf
,

cont rolled livi ng in the ev e ry day life then on e

-
,

has put upon hims elf an incalc ulable inj ury by

comi ng und e r such c on trol E ve rything in the
.

rhtu re of c ont rol that i s n ot residen t in the l n

in dividual s life is a pernicious infl u ence t e

’
, ,

s trictin g bo th the fre edom an d the d evelopm en t

o f the in dividual It is a singular condition o f

.

the times that scientific inv estigators in psychic

phenomena are m ore interested in abn ormal
psychic ph enomen a and abno rmal psychol ogy
than i n an y real o r defin ite efi ort to get at
 Th e Ps ychic Pl
an e 53

wh at would con stitute t rue p sychology or

a kn owledge o f real psychic ph en omen a Per .

haps out of all this in ve stigati on will come some

good be cause man somehow must kn ow the
,

e vi l c onc e rning thing s before he realiz es the im

po rtan c e o f th e good F or a ti me we lea rn per

.
,

haps more through o ur mista kes an d our fail

,

ures than through rightly dir ect ed efi orts o r

s uccess e s and from th e strenuou s efi orts o f the
,

many wh o h ave be en d elvin g in to the abn ormal

psychic rea lm must come a n atural reaction ,

which will turn the in ves ti gat i on not only to the

,

s tudy but to the uses o f n o rmal psychi c devel

,

op men t .

Th e psych i c plan e is n ot far from any o f us ;

i f o n e can con s ciously cause the brain to c ease
its ac ti viti e s an d clo s e bo th the physical eye s and
e a rs to s eein g an d hearing oute r phenomen a ,

s u ch a one is ready t o e nte r or al ready has en

,

te red the psychic realm

, Thi s rea l
. m has its
m any degrees an d on e may only kn ow an d see
,

in a very fain t or i nd efinite way or one mdy ,

enter in to a new wo rld of consciousness fill ed ,

with mo re wonderful things for eye s to s ee an d

more wonder ful vibrations for e ars to h ea r than
an y he wa s abl e to appreciate wi th his o u ter con

s cio u sn ess Desire that gets its i mp ul se from

.

th e h i gh es t i nner fee ling is the gr eatest im

,

p ell in g force to kn owledge an d understan ding

54 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

o f the psychic plane Th e s ensitive wh o can

.

keep his feet on earth while h is head an d heart

,

a re i n the hea vens i s th e o ne wh o is goin g to

,

p rofit most from the kn owledge .

Wh en anyone l ose s h i s t rue adj u stm en t t o

inner an d outer consciousness then he becomes ,

m en ta lly unbalan ced and is n o longer living a

n o rmal l i fe
. We may dra w al lour pl an s o f l i v
in g from the p sychic side o f life but the s e pl an s ,

can only be demon st rated in an o ut e r way an d ,

we should be j ust as much c oncern ed wi th the

d em onstration a s we were in rec ei v ing the pl an
n ec e s sary to i t . Th e normal psychic will there ,

fo re b e the mo st highly develope d m an be ca use

, ,

he will hav e originality o f thought an d als o be

capabl e of givi ng actual demon st ration to wha t
he ha s th ought Th e abnormal psychi c m ay
.

have a thousand plans all o f them o f u s e bu t

, ,

n ot one o f them which he is abl e to use h i mself ,

because he h as lost hi s relationship to th e re

q u i rem en ts of t he ou t er li f e It is.more n e c e s

sary for the psychic to take a fi rm hold on the

physical life and i ts c onsci ousn e ss than it is ,

fo r th e man wh o h as n o con s ciousn ess of th e

psychic plan e .

Th e true psychi c is never di spos ed to grati fy

the i dle cu riosity of the won d e r seekers H e -
.

will n ot u s e his power for any pu rpose th at i s

n ot going to make fo r som e re al o r lasting g oo d .
 Th e Ps ychi c P l
an e 55

Wh e neve r you h ear th e ps ychic talk of th e

wond er s he o r s h e is able to d o or wh en they
,

a r e exploi ti ng their inn ate powers fo r materi al

gain th en you may rest a ssured that their de
,

vel opmen t is o f an abnormal n atu re What they

.

do may be sati s fying to th e curi ou s or to th e ,

w e ak min d ed but i s not going to prove bene

-
,

ficial to the seeker after truth I kn ow how

.

important i t i s that people Should have m oney to

m eet their Obliga tion s in thi s world an d th at ,

th e psychic needs mon ey just the same as any

,

o n e el se an d when he d evotes h i s ti me to an
,

e ndeavor to be h el pful to others he should re ,

ce ive paym en t for his time as on e recei ve s in

,

any other wal k of life But wh en he make s his

.

psychic kn owl e dge a m eans O f acquiring wo rldly

wealth or grati fying s elfish ends an d purpos e s
, ,

h e is getting dange rously n ear to what might

b e te rme d black magic and the good that b e ap
,

p a r en tly gains in ma ter ial th ings is over shadow e d

by th e ha rm h e doe s him self in a psychic and
spi ritu al way .

Th e true p sychic should be mo re unsel fish

than the p er son who kn ows nothing about th e
psychic st ate fo r th e reason that h e is in pos
,

—
s e ssion of g re ater knowl edge kn owl e dge that
should fit him not only to ex ercis e a greater ,

but a mo re beneficial infl uence upon the l i ve s of

oth er pe ople To whom m u c h kn owle dg e and
.
5 6 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

power are gi ven much will be requi red Wh en

,
‘

right adju stm en t i s made to th e psych ic plan e ,

hea lth happin ess an d mental ha rmony wi ll re

,

sult ; but when on e is adjusted in a false way ,

then the results are mo re f ar reaching in thei r

-

distu rbing eff e cts t han by an ything that co uld

possibly take pl ac e on the material plan e of
li fe .

man can determin e for h ims elf as to

E ve ry
what h is rel ation is going to be to th is won

d erf ul pl an e o f m en tal an d so ul a ctivi ti e s .

The re is a st rait an d n arro w way wh i ch wi ll ,

lead to untold gain H e wh o takes that way

.

will never ha ve any reason to regret it A n ew .

—
wo rld will unfold to his visi on a world filled
with the h arm oni es of colo r and s oun d an d a s ,

time goe s on all thi s colo r and sound wi ll be

,

rev eale d to him in an outer way I t will take .

expression in the great physical world in forms

of b eauty as the manifestation o f th e hi dden
,

mysteri e s of life becoming expre ssed on earth .

 TH E TREE OF KNOWLEDGE
We are li vin g in a world where law an d order
reign s upreme Nothing happ en s ; the re is n o
.

chan ce or lu ck . E verythi n g that takes pl ace ,

whether we call it good o r evi l is th e result o f

,

en e rgy a c ti n g in th e life etern a l It is nece ssary

.

that the seed should be planted in th e earth and ,

that it should germ i n ate an d di e in o r de r tha t ,

th e p lan writt en into the seed which is th e t re e

, ,

s hould be exp res sed . Th e fall o f the seed is

a p pa ren t , rather than rea l There i s n o de
.

st ru cti on of l i fe or i deal but an expre ssion o f a

,

la rger ideal and a greater life .

I f s in di sea se an d death are the products

,

o f man s own th ough t an d a cti on

’
he will be ,

left in th e dark a s to h ow to ov ercome them

un ti l he is able to account for the mann er in
wh i ch they came i nto exi stence If the re was
.

a ti me in m an s life no matter h ow remote

’
, ,

when h e was pure an d inno cent we may w e ll ,

a s k oursel v es h ow i t wa s po ssible for him to

depa rt from that sta te Nea rly all o f the sac re d

.

books in th e world agree that the soul p roce eds

pure and innocent from the Infinite in the image
an d l ik enes s of its Cre ato r while later in th e se
,

57
5 8 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

Sacred books we have allego ri cal stories of the

,
'

fall of th e s oul and t he dire consequences t e

,

s ultin g from this fall .

Th e desce nt of man into what i s call ed the

mate rial uni ve rse is no loss It is only tha t .

image and like n e ss of God which writt e n i nto , ,

th e life of man is seeking to find fu l l and f ree

,

expres si on in an ext e rnal wo rl d I t is t he .

power of God in the life s eeking perfect ma n i ,

f es tation .

In the life of man i n the ext e rnal world ex ,

is ten ce seems to ha v e two aspe ct s o r conditions ,

which in common speech w e call good and evi l .

The i r p r esenc e seem s e ve rywh ere and we are ,

contin ually called upon to de cid e as b e tw ee n th e

two We ask what is right M an is kept in a
. .

st ate O f un re st b ecaus e h e i s always and at all

tim e s having to choos e b etw ee n th e two .

I t would s eem th erefore that two p owe rs

, ,

a re ruling and cont rol ling the wo rl d of man .

We spe ak of th e good of life its st re ngth i ts , ,

growth its per fe ction ; and as if an oth er force

, ,

w ere opposing this with equ al if not wi th

g re at e r pow er w e spe ak of w eakn e ss of i m per
, ,

f ection of dis e as e and d e ath

, .

Man makes th e s e distinctions on all plan es of

existence In nature for ce s a re good o r e vil
.

acco rding to the i r e ff e ct on th e li f e and e flo rts

of man O n a highe r plane w e u se th e same
.
60 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

This uni ty a s shown i n creati on an d in li fe

isth e foun dation on wh i ch we r e st in the discu s

sion o f the questi on whether these two c on di

tion s o f life good and evil a re equal powers in
, ,

the world an d whether man has power within

,

him s elf to work with o r agai n st them .

E verything we see i s a manife station o f

power Al . lvis ible thi ngs a re sign s o f power ,

an d the power of God is al ways and eve rywhe r e

goo d Ne ve rthele s s we must ackn owledge that

.
,

we are c onf ront ed with what man te rms evil .

It is evi dently some part of life and in o rder ,

to comprehen d it we will h ave to study li fe its elf .

Life must be it s own int erp reter .

No matter on what plane of exp res sion we

study life i t all com e s befo re us as action An d
, .

this act ion i s a cont roll e d r egula r mov emen t ,

that repeats itself from time to time an d thu s

, ,

establishes the law of its existence an d the l aw ,

is that powe r lies within th e f o rm s o f li fe an d

, ,

wo rks from th e i r centers outwa rd .

Take as an illustration an apple seed , It is .

a unit to begin with I t is a greater unit when

.

it is grown Th e wo rk of growth i s all from

.

th e cen ter o f the s ee d o utward As soon a s th e .

s e ed i s planted it begins to expand and in ti me ,

the whole t ree appea r s root trun k bran ch

, , , ,

bloss om an d fru it Al
,
lthese part s c ome fr om
.

the origi n al seed It is one life from first to

.
 Th e Tree o f K n owl
edge 6!

l ast It i s the devel

. opmen t o f what was born
wi t hin th e seed at i ts c reation th e plan wri tten
,

i n to it in th e beginn in g .

Th e l aw of growt h as i l lu strated by n atu re is

e xa ctly th e sam e as that wh i ch is fol lowed by
s o ul mi nd an d body
, , . Al lt hin gs proc eed f rom
o n e source Al
. lgrow in confo rmity to on e l aw ,

— from within outw , ard .

Al lforms of li fe are b ut sign s of power gi ven

at birth .Why then a re not allthin gs good !
I n t his un ity of life an d growth when ce comes ,

e vi l ! I f all powe rs proceed from God then ,

G od is th e on ly power n o matt er what the seem

,

in g n o matt er wha t th e con diti on s outs ide

,

may be .

Th e expl an a ti on which we gi ve to th is p rob

le m is found b y looki ng at life a s a whole When .

fo rce is gi ven as in the ca s e of the seed i t is

, ,

g ive n a c erta i n w o rk to perf o rm It has a

. de
s ign to express an d its power i s limited by the
,

chara cter th at belon g s to i t so that each seed

,

p rodu ce s a fter its kind Now in the wo rking

.

o u t of t hi s de s ign o f i ts being each thing and ,

ea ch person meets with re sistan ce ; encount er s

th e opposi ng fo rce of oth e r things that are al s o

g ro w in g an d ta ki n g thei r places as f o rms o f

power on earth .

Th es e two con di ti on s then m u st be thought

, ,

—
o f tog eth er th e a ctio n o f fo rce wi thin an d ,
62 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

th e resistance of fo rce without ; the a ction o f

li fe from the c enter outward and the reaction
—
of life the resistance of force upon the ou t
,

s ide
. Al lgrowth a rise s b e tw e en the s e t w o .

When fo rce wo rks outwa rd from th e cen t er

in a per fe ct way it ful fills it s design I t ex .

tends its material form as fa r as it was inte nded

to go and the result is pe r fe ct o r what we ca l
, l ,

good B u t in cont rast wh en fo rc e doe s not

.
,

fulfill its design the resu lt is impe rfection or ,

only a partial d ev elopment and we call it a bad,

or an e vil thing At th e heart of eve rything

.

i s will and powe r bestowed by God and this

will and pow er is th e controlling an d di rectin g
fo rce of all expression .

F rom its pe r f ect unhinde red a ction c ome s

eve ry thing we call good Again we have on .

th e out sid e the r e sist ance o f fo rce Opposition ,

of h e at and cold of wind and s un th e p ressure

, ,

of materials as a boa rd on the grass the pre s

, ,

s ure of ci rc umstances that forbid the life wi thin

t o ass e rt i tself in a f ree spont an e ous way
, .

In this vi e w O f the u nity of life we s ee that

ev erything we call good is the life of God
mani f e sting itsel f fully and f re ely in harmon y
with its plan o r de sign and that evil is on ly thi s
,

sam e life of God di vert ed f rom i ts tru e source ,

mani f e sted in part only not in o rde r but out o f

, ,

harmony with its own design At the center in .

,
 Th e Tree o f K n owl
edge 63

wh at ever degre e life o r fo r ce exi sts it is per ,

f ect, ste adfa st , inva ri ab l e At the cen t er there

.

is no such reality as e vil Al lis good al lis

.
,

r ea l all is tru e an d changeless But upon the

, .

o ut s ide wh ere we get the r esul ts of g row th al l ,

is changeable an d t ran si to ry H ere we leave .

th e plane of cau se an d sta nd am ong the e ff ects

,

o f g rowt h and here al

, lis va ri able .

H e r e we find n on f ulfil men t i rregularity de

l , ,

s tr uct ion of form H ere we find the evi l o f

.

l ife s in sorrow si ckn ess and death

, , , , .

It is the natural thi n g that man being bo rn ,

i n t o th is wo rld o f form should at fi rst suppos e

,

all to be e qually real in cha racter But when .

h e asks for the cau s e of any one thing o r O f all ,

things for that m atter and starting from an y

,

conditi on on the outside wo rks back to its b e ,

ginning he will find but on e force one ori gin

, , ,

on e cause of life f or e v ery thing .

H e is co mpelled to t urn back with the knowl

e dg e oi un ity an d t o kn ow that all power i s
,

on e th at al
,
lpower is good and that this good ,

n ess i s al lthere is that e vi l i s only the lack o f

,

good .

There is n o sourc e n o great c ent ral poi nt

,

f rom whi ch evil p roc eeds Seek wh ere we will .

we can n ot find it As in natu re th ere is bu t

.

on e s un fo r a whole system of plan ets so fo r ,

th e b ein g o f man there is but one c e nt er o f life

64 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

an d intelligen ce As the sun is th e lig ht o f th e

.

world so through all ages an d among al

, l peo
ples it has taken its plac e as the symb ol of Deity .

But i f we can look away f rom good an d regard ,

evi l a s anothe r reality a po wer wo r ki ng a gain st

,

g oo d ,we are led to a s k Wh a t is the ,

s ymb o l
o f th is Dei ty ! Certainly na tu r e d oe s n ot gi ve
an y other S ign of c r eative po wer than light If .

there is an y othe r symbol i t i s darkn es s We .

have th en the qu e sti on What i s light ! ,

!

Wh at i s darkn ess ! !

Nat ur e show s that light i s th e p re s en c e of the

s un ; that darkn ess is i t s ab s ence This leaves .

—
us only one reality light go odne ss l i fe an d
,
— ,

teache s that all evil all im perfection blight an d

, ,

want a re but signs o f the absence o f good

, .

Wh e n this grand b ut Si mple t ruth be comes

clea r as a science of life an d its on ly explan a
tion we shall apply i t to human life an d by i ts
, ,

mean s discove r that the re a re n either good n or

bad people ; that those whom we n ow l ook u pon
a s b a d o r e vil w i ll in the light of t his truth ap
, , ,

—
pear as they a re undeveloped as th ose who
, ,

hav e not fulfille d the idea an d th e power whi ch

they were born to represent th e i dea an d power ,

which they still have within them as poten tial

possibiliti es .

Man sta nds between the fo rce of l i fe with in

an d the fo rm o f life wi thou t H e s truggl es .
 Th e Tree f
o Kn owl
edge 65

x ss th e life wi thin him To a degree he

to e p re .

s uc cee ds ; to a degree he fai ls Allfailure is .

a l oss i n the s um of the world s p ro gres s But’

.

n ot al l failure i s to be r ega rded as evil in th e

s e n s e that man is s ubj ec t t o j udgm en t for what

h e h as or h as n ot don e It i s only when the re

.

is d elibera te an d con sci ou s refu sal on the part

o f man to c onform to th e l aw o f Go d t hat there

can be s aid t o be an y real i ty to evi l An d even .

th e n while one may be morally r e spon s ibl e for

,

wrong done to others the pri n ci ple remain s the

,

s am e an d the t ru e statem en t i s that the will

,

was not di rect ed acco r di n g t o th e l aw o f G od

tha t th e force within did n ot take th e right

form as i t rea ched the plane of re su lts ; that i t
did not culminat e in a blessi ng to human ity b ut ,

en ded in a li e .

Th e d evil th e Pri nce of Da rkn e ss is also !

, ,

th e Fathe r of Li es an d we notice that h is

,
!

place i s the oute r darkn e ss H e has nothing

.
!

to do with the c en t er o f light and forc e wi thin

us. O n the other plane whe re we allow life
,

to d e ny its own de s ign — in the clouds which

we create by our la ck of force in carryi ng the
l —
ight is the domain of th e devil An d ev en .

the re as s oon a s we c omprehend that evil is

,

o nly th e lack of good an d that we have all goo d

,

within oursel v es the power o f darkn es s is gon e

,
.

It is on ly a qu es tion o f our own will an d eff o rt ,

66 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

and o f the will and eflort o f others as t o h ow ,

s oon da rk ne ss a n d e vil as c ondition s subj e ct to

,

change Shall give place to immortal goo dn ess

,

an d light .

E vil is alway s s poken o f i n c omparison wi th

g oo d. T h e pe r fe ction o f life i s an i deal tha t b y
nature belongs to the hu man mind By insti n ct .

man kn ows and loves to feel the abs ol ut e per

man en ce and abiding trut h th at un derlie exi s t
en ce and i t i s really becau se the h e art by nature
,

rest s upon thi s sense o f unity and pe rfe ction ,

that man has s o Ofte n resisted the progr ess o f

kn owle dge H e has n ot wi shed to be di st u rbed
. .

Ca rlyl e says Th e l a w of pers ev e rance is

among th e deepe s t i n man ; by nature he ha tes

chan ge ; seldom wi l l he qui t his O l d house ti ll
i t h as act u ally fallen ab out hi s ears Th e le s
.

s on f or u s t o learn is th at while t he outer l i fe

must bring change const antly yet the re i s n o ,

disturbanc e an d n o loss when w e ourselv es bri n g

light from th e center to annihilat e the dev il an d
hi s outer darkn e ss .
!

As we have seen the explan ation of our

,

p roblem li e s i n ou r understanding that li fe is

p rogres s ; that it rises in God moves out in to ,

Natur e on th e physical plan e of existen ce mee ts ,

th ere the resi stanc e of force working wi th di f

f e ren t d egr ee s of st rength and thence begi n s its
,

return towa rd Go d by gain i ng a comprehen sion

68 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

It requ i re s help f rom out si de i ndeed but th a t , ,

help mu st be di rect ed f rom the vi tal cent er i f

it wo u ld change th e external life .

An d he r e w e to u ch th e principle o f relati on
ship the one great principl e O f life by v irtue
, ,

o f which all a r e pa rts on e of anoth e r Life is .

a great o rganism with one cur rent flowi ng

,

through all Th e real good of one th erefore

.
, ,

i s the re al good of all To touch thi s ch o rd i n

.

one human sou l is t o cau se i t to vib rate fa r an d

wide to send it out as a gift t o all E ve ry right
, .

i mpu lse O f life che rishe d and worke d out into

,

a ction up on this external plane of existe nce ,

bec omes a he lp f u l s unny i nflu ence that bl e sse s

,

many li ve s It is true re sistance is off ered to

.
,

th e gift ; some do not kn ow it s valu e ; s ome do

not kn ow what th ey a re doing when they oppos e
to it the n e gati v es O f life and dilig ent ly c u lti
,

vate Sin so rr ow and distre ss ; but this is what

, ,

we n ow have to l ea rn that the powe r of th e ,

inne r man has infl ue nce to change the o uter ;

that all is good at the c ente r ; that all fo r ce i s
good n o matter what th e outer form or acti on
,

may b e ; that man has th e powe r withi n him s elf

to control th e fu ll fo rce of h is being ; and that
to do this h e only needs t o know and act w i thin
the law .

At on e stage of life w e lo ok upon t he o uter

as reality and upon the inn er life as someth in g
,
 Th e Tree o f K n owl
edg e 69

that vague an d intangible An d a t an other

is .

stage we kn ow that all tru th exi sts be cau s e of

the inner and that the outer on ly symbolize s
,

i t Th e oute r embodi e s t o a deg re e the inner

.
, ,

li fe S o the whole life is chan ged and man b e

.
,

comes a new c reation This is what the New .

Te stame nt mean t by the r e newi ng of th e mind .

It is mad e new by the und erstanding of life an d ,

thi s u nde r sta nding b e gins in the he art an d ,

wo rks f rom the r e int o the outer life .

We s ee people warring against each other .

I t is be cau se th ey a re still de aling with the pa r

tial an d th eir one unde rlying thought is for the
,

p re serv ation of the se lf At fi rst it is th e p rese r

.

v ation of th e i ndi vidu al self that s eems the all

impo rtan t thi ng Late r com e s th e gre ate r
.

thought and eflort for th e p reservation of others

’
,

as is exp res sed in the fami ly l ife in th e ci v ic and ,

in th e nat ional life an d th e thought ever wid e n

,

in g finally take s in o r comp rehends all life .

Th e prese rvati on of the indi vid u al was a

n eedfu l degree of the still gre at e r p re s e rvation .

It was right so far as it we nt but it did not go

, ,

fa r en ough Th e indi vidual appa rently thought

.

that in o rder to p reserve his own li f e h e mu st do

s ome thi n g to inju re som eone el s e if that some ,

one el s e seemed to stand in his way An d s o .

th ere came the fricti on th e clashi ng of life in,

two o ppo s i ng fo rm s .
70 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

At one time in life it is the law o f compe ti

tion each pe rson t rying to get all he can for
,

himself and gi ving a s little as po ssible in re

,

tu rn By an d by the re comes the higher kn owl

.

edge when one sees and kn ows that he re c eive s

,

mo st by givi n g most Then all the competition .

i n life is gone Th e mo re we gi ve the m ore we

.

recei ve Competition is on e en d of the law an d

.
,

co Operat i on is the ot he r whe r e people all wo rk

-
,

together fo r the common good But we begin .

e verything in the pa rtial way It is the com .

mon way in fact the only way o f indi v idual

, ,

life and by this way th rough kn owledge will

, , ,

be wo rked out all the greate r things in life .

I said b e fo re that i t was impossible t o take

up anything and examine it ca refully going ,

back to its sou rce an d find anything there b ut ,

good Th e law of resistanc e o r self p reserva

.
,
-

t ion is n ot contradictory to the law of non re

,
-

s is tan ce It is a deg ree of the law Resista nce

. .
,

howe v er i s always intended fo r the p reservation

,

o f the part an d i t is ess ential that the pa rt

,

should be p rese rved But later on in th e de .

vel opmen t of life when the pa rt understan ds it s

,

relation t o the whole t hen comes the law of ,

n on resist ance or co ope r at i on o f ea ch pa rt wi th

-
,
-

all of the pa rts .

Th rough the law of cont radictories we fin d ,

that resistance as we under stand it i s not the

, ,
 Th e Tree f
o Kn owl
edge 7:

be s t thin g When on e st ri kes his han d vio

.

l en tly ga ain st a ha rd s ub stan ce he s u fi ers fr om ,

i t So we kn o w that f rom an y fo rm of re
.

s is tan ce there co mes the rem in der t o u s that it

is n ot the best way because o f the s uff ering that

,

e nsue s Whenever we su ff e r from anythin g it

.
,

is because we are wo rking from the pa rtial side

o f life instea d o f with the whole of life
, We .

make our own s u fi erin g We may thi n k that

.

othe r peopl e make i t for us but if we should ,

re fuse to s u fi er how could othe r people make u s

do so ! Many of the marty rs who we re bu rned
a t the stake refu s ed to su ff e r They could sing .

and re j oice when their bodies w ere bu rning .

A n d how could they s ing if they we re su ff e ring

intensely ! They had risen above su ff ering and ,

s o can we rise above it .

When people as we s ay inj ure or spe ak ill

, ,

of u s if we make something ou t of it we ha ve
,

formed a poi n t of contact between ou rsel ve s an d

them . An d evi l goes on growi n g in the life ,

s e e mingly becoming a greater thing all th e time .

But if the re we re no points of contact th en th e ,

evil would pass away It could have n o powe r

.

to a fi ect an ythin g f or ill M uch of what w e.

call evil comes f rom our failu re to se e an d to

confo rm t o the law o f n on re sistan ce I f we -
.

wish to ove rcome we must not use the law in

,

a partial way but in it s fullness its compl et e

, ,
72 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

n es s I f people say o r do evi l things do n ot d o

.
,

or say evil thi n gs in r eturn The re i s n o n eed

.

for allowing th e feelings to be hurt o r e ve n fo r

allowing the mi n d to dwell upon the unki n d t e
marks or actions o f other s This is only givi ng
.

reality to their n egati ve th ought s and deed s an d

forming a poi nt o f contact with them thereby ,

permittin g all thei r ev il thought s and feeling s

t o act n ot on ly to distu rb u s but also to call
, ,

i nto existence simila r thought s and feelings in

— —
our own mind s non re si s tan ce the overcom
-

—
ing of evi l with good shows u s the way Re .

fuse to recei ve o r retai n ev il an d i t ca n do you

n o harm .

I t is n ece ssa ry fo r development in li fe that

we should s ee and u nde rsta n d ev ery pha s e o f
life That is ou r Tree o f Kn owl edge o f G ood
.

and E vil A n d wh e n we have reached a place

.

wh ere we s ee that all i s goo d t he Tree of ,

Knowledge is n o longe r needful I t will n ot b e .

n ecessary fo r us to continue eating it s frui ts ,

because we shall hav e laid h old upon the Tree

of Life an d the new B ook o f Life will b e
,

open ed ; f or a t ime comes when we clo se the old

B ook whe rein we had written s ome th in gs
,

called goo d an d some thin gs called evil ;

,

wh er ei n we h ad written health and disea se l i fe ,

an d dea th love and hate We had only been

, .

able to see in part ; bu t when we see i n real ity,

 Th e Tree f
o K n owl
edge 73

or in the wholene ss an d completeness o f life

, ,

we shall write n oth ing in o ur new Book o f Life

tha t shall in an y way defile We shall write of
.

life an d joy an d love of health and strength

, , , ,

an d our n ew B ook of Life will be filled wi th

et e rn al realitie s
.

Th i s Book will s till be the sub conscious -

mind but every th ought pictu r e that ente r s this

,
-

s ub con scious mind will b e h a rmoniously re

-

lat e d to all the other th ought pictu res We will

-
.

have ceased t o lea rn o f th e realitie s o f life

through that which contradi ct s them ; an d ther e
wil l no lon ge r be any evil in the wo rld for ,

righteou snes s shall cove r the fac e of th e earth ,

a s t he wa ter s c over t he face o f th e great deep .

 THE M I ND S
’
B OO K OF L I FE

I call that part o f us which thi n ks reason s ,

a n d gives judgm ents the conscious m i nd

, .Th e
consci ous mind sta n ds relat ed to natu re on one
side an d its subj ective self on the other
, .

Th ro ugh the aid of th e senses it comes in tou ch

with physical phenomena an d th r ough a p rocess
,

which we call the pictu ring or imaging faculty ,

these obj ec tive things are pictured in the con

scious mind acco rding t o the varyi n g degrees of
development in each m ind .

Th e sa v age is li ving in a very sm all w orld ,

because of the limitations of his mind s pi ctu ri n g

’

faculty Th e highly civilized man lives in a

.

larger world because o f his inc rea s ed m en tal

vision If the civi l ized man s ees one hundred
.

o r one t h ousand fold more in the world than the

sa vage it must be because a larger wo rld h as

resulted f rom h is own mental developm en t .

This i s n ot a qu esti on of what we call sen se

devel opme n t because the sense nature of th e
,

savage i s n ea re r and in close r touch with n ature

than the s ens e natu re of the highly civi lized
74
76 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

in wood or sto ne Pla n s a re w rough t out fir st

.

in the mind, and later bec ome ext ernal ized i n

matt e r Th e outer manifesta tion n ever is quit e
.

so full o r complete as the i n ner While we have

.

att ribut e d to t he mind o f man bot h con s tru c tive

and dest ructi v e cha racte r istics o u r appli c ation

,

of this thought has be e n re st ricted to m an s ’

m ent al and mo r al n atu re and to a l e sser de

,

gree to physical things outside of himse lf Th e .

physical body o f man has b e en conside re d la rgely

e xempt from such appl ication as though i t had
,

a l ife of its own s e pa rate and distinct f r om the

,

mind We hav e not l ooke d upon th e bo dies we

.

li ve in as the pr oduct of ou r own thought an d

feel ing We ha ve not thought of the life wi thin
.

u s as b e ing the a rchit e ct and builde r of i ts own

habitat ion ; and yet for countl ess age s th e p roc

,

ess of bui l ding a t e mple fit fo r the immortal

soul to l ive in has bee n goin g on and the wo rk ,

is not yet complet e d and will n ot be unt il i n the ,

full n e ss of time the i mmort al bo dy is pr odu c ed

, ,

free fro m dis e ase and death An d the pa rt that

.

mind is to play in the constr ucti on o f an im

mo rtal temple is a very grea t one Th e mind o f .

man is a t p resen t only imagi n g the t ran si en t ,

the temporal body ; and yet i t has alway s h ad

,

th e p rophecy i n itself and h as longed fo r an

e te rnal one.

The r e i s n o law of death bu t the r e is a law

,
'
 The M in d s B ook Life
’

f
o 77

of ch an ge That which is parti al in al

. lfo rms
t en ds toward greater fullne ss an d completen ess .

I t i s the ideal that is ever s eeki ng exp res s i on

through form Change take s place because of
.

—
two appa r en tly oppo si n g fo rce s the pre s su re o f
the i deal from within an d the pressu re o f en
,

vi ron men t from w i thout — producing a con stant

e ff o rt o f the life t o adjust itself betwee n the
two . The materialistic scien tist can only see
th e pre ssure o f envi r on m ent wo rking to shape
th e life s o as to co nform t o its dem an ds Th e .

s o c alled law o f n atu r al select ion is m ade t o d o

-

du ty for al l that can n ot be explained in any

othe r physical way Plan or design has no place
.

in c reation Life i s less than i ts form Th e

. .

physical en vi ron m en t m ake s th e form M ind .

,

li fe spirit are p ro ducts o f matte r and are s ub

, , ,

j cet t o it S o rea sons the man who says in hi s

.

h e art : The r e is no Go d Th ere is no sel f

.

e x i sten t being i mbued with i n te llige nce Who ,

giveth life an d int elligence t o e ve ry moving

thing : S pon taneous gen eration in matter sta r ,

dust or an y other theory w i ll an swer qu it e as

,

well
!
.

Th e man wh o bel i eve s in t he s up r emacy o f

Spiri t conten ds that th e ideal is written into th e
l ife an d that i ts un folding take s place in mat
,

—
t er wh ich is on ly the clothing o f Spirit That .

w h i le the pressure o f en vi ronme nt f rom with

78 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

out may dwa r f or thwart for a time its expres

sion yet as the ideal exi s ts in the very consti
,

tution of l i f e no pow er in hea ve n or ea rth can

p reve nt its ultimate full and pe r fect expression ;
that life is not a sponta n eous physical acti on ,

devoi d o f intelligent d e sign no r yet i s i t a ,

theory a sta r dust being precipitated on the

,
-

earth wh en in th e p rocess of time the ea rth

, , ,

b ecome s habitable fo r life .

Li fe int elligen c e is in all th rough al

, l ab ove
, , ,

all F rom it comes all things It s law an d

. .

o r der a re eve rywhe re Nothing is so s mall but .

that life li ve s in i t and intell igen ce direct s i t , .

No s u n is s o la rge that it d oe s not pulsate to a

life that is both within and without it Life —
which move s the univer se f rom the center to t he
—
ci rcumference an all emb racing Life t hat i s -

omnisci ent omnipote nt omnip resen t Al

, llife i s , .

one Life F rom the O ne com e s al

. lthe dive r sity
o f exp re ssi on From the whole comes th e par
.

tial F r om the sou rce comes all the degr ee s o f

.

life an d intelligenc e F rom t h e lowest even to .

the great e st Life i s ever becoming man ifested

,

th r ough fo rm building .

Th roughout th e G reat Fo rever Li fe c reat e s ,

on e form a f ter anoth er in o rde r to expres s out ,

wa rdl y o r image, all that L if e itself con

, ta in s .

Life is al l in all in th e smallest of things an d

,

in the greatest of things Th e Universal S oul .

 Th e M in d s B ook f Life
’
o 79

live s in al l as the pri s mati c col

, ors o f the sun live
in t he dewdrop .

O n e very plan e o f being there is cause an d

e ff e ct ; on every plan e o f being the re is law an d
o r de r ; and one plane of life di ff ers from an
oth er rathe r in degree than in kin d As men .

d ev elop from lowe r to higher plan es they look

u pon t hat which t hey have left behind as s ome

thing little short o f evil E ve ry plan e of bei n g

.

is good bu t as we fill the n ee ds an d requi re

,

me n ts of each plane we pass on to a greater

state o f development an d in doi n g this we ap ,

p e a r to l ea ve the things of the past b ehind .

N e verth eless on each and ev ery plan e to which

,

we pas s w e carry the reco r d with us of what we

have thought what we hav e been an d what we
, ,

ha ve done .

—
Th e bei n g and thi n king is fi s t the consciou s
r

a ction o f mind th r ough the imaging fac u lty B ut .

this in turn becomes s ub conscious an d remain s

, ,
-

w i th us as a part of ou r w ritten book of life .

O u r book of life is all we hav e ever thought ,

s ee n an d done and is reco rded ind el ibly in th e

,

s u b conscious mi nd
-
Some conscious me ntal a c
.

tion is the cause and th e e ff e ct is the pictu r e

,

l e ft u pon the mind by that action This pictu re .

,

th e n be comes pa rt of the history of the life

, .

But the s ub conscious mind is al so th e Tre e of

-

the Knowledge of Good and E vil As thought .

80 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

pictures come up again into the consciou s ex

is ten ce f rom sub conscious to c onsci ous mind
,
-
,

w e are aff e ct e d by them fo r good o r ill We .

look upon them as being good o r e v i l con s tru c ,

ti ve or de structi ve Th e mind s b ook of li fe i s

.
’
,

in reality on e great pictu r e of soul progres s

, ,

f rom th e infancy of the s oul t o its manhood or

p er fection in this world Bu t i t i s only whe n
.

life s great pictu re is full y po rtrayed that we are

’

able to see it in its completion .

Al lthe di ff eren t planes ha ve the i r own though t

pictu res wh ere in ligh t an d shade are equally
,

nece ssary B ut we are icon tin ual

. ly deta ching
o n e f r om the othe r calli ng on e good an d th e
,

other evil while every expe rience in life is u ccea

,

sary fo r the unfol ding of Li f e s grea t picture o f ’

S el f One plane of being is the necessary foun

.

dation for the attainm ent of the nex t I t i s .

really the sou l s subj ection of t hings upon on e

’

pl ane that is neede d fo r th e conquest o f an other

plane O ne stage in the p rogress of life is j u s t
.

as n ecessa ry as anothe r I t is as n ecess a ry that

.

man should fi r st o f all be an animal th e c rown ,

ing wo rk o f the animal c reation as that h e , .

shoul d b e a Ch rist the c r owning work of th e

,

Wo rld s spiritual creation An d eve ry in terven

’
.

ing stage betw ee n is neces s a ry fo r the full an d

complet e de velopmen t of life There is always .
,

how ever a st ruggl e between the past an d the

,
 Th e M in d s B ook Life
’
o f 81

p r esent . Desi r es an d habit s f o rm ed on on e

plan e i n te r fere with n ew desi res an d habits on
an othe r plane , this i n te rfe r ence p roducing the
inha rmony and un rest of life But i t i s on ly .

throu gh such struggles that the mind of man

grows stron g an d asserts its sup remacy over
things . On all these varying planes ev erything
has its r elativ e value but the value o f on e plane
,

is n ot to be confused or confounded with th e

valu e of anothe r Neith er is th e application of
.

law u po n one plane to be the sam e as the ap

pli cation on anoth e r It is th e one law yet the
.
,

gre ater knowl e dge b rings with i t the wide r ap

—
p l ica ti on n ot nec e ssa ri ly th e better application ,

b ut rathe r th e la rger application .

E v ery thing in life is good in its ri ght rela

t i on but the pe r fe ct adj ustmen t on on e plan e
,

v arie s from that o f anothe r S o day by day .

c on stan t change is nece ssary for a complete a d

j ustment to Life Th e conscious mind of man
.

conceives it self to b e related on one hand to a

dead past on the other to a l iving p r esent or
,

an anticipated futu re But the re is no such

.

thing as a d ead past E ve rything pass ed th rough

.
,

f r om the le ast to the g reatest ca rri e s with i t its

,

o wn rec ord and this is a li ving r ec or d of life

s t or ed away in th e sub conscious mind -

Th e .

things of the s o cal le d past that do n ot ha rmon

-

ize w i th the things of the present w e call evi l

82 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

or sinful things Thi s s en se of s in o r evi l i n u s

.

is the prolific cause of diseas e and death I t is .

this w rong sense that is to be ove rcome in life .

Th r ough kn owledge e v e rything in the life

,

Call it good o r evil — has wo rked t ogether for

o u r d eve l opmen t Th e past i s n ot a book o f the
.

d ead but rath er a part o f Life s great li ving

,
’

book Th e ev er abiding p resent will add to i t

.

an d make i t complet e .

Let the thought o f the s tability o f life ent er

—
into the conscious mind that at n o time i n life
do es the indi vidual exp ression b e come sepa rated
fr om th e Uni ver sal Whole The r e is no instan t
.

whe n i n di vidual life ceases to b e There may b e .

transition or change in form but th e re i s per ,

man en cy stability at th e c en te r of life i n each

, ,

i ndividual We a re n ot en gaged in painting

.

a pictu re of d e ath at one t i me and of life a t

an oth e r bu t we are painting a pi ctu re t h at
,

has to do with life from fi rst t o last though ,

f rom fi rst t o last the re a re degre e s of life love ,

and int ell igence Th e past repre sen t s a les s e r

.

degre e of intell igence a small e r life bu t in n o

‘

, ,

sense does i t re p res e nt ev il o r de ath Th e large r .

l ife and th e great er ideal may look back on th e

past as a condition of e v il o r death and may ,

get pre s ent re sults f rom so doing But the fa ct .

n everth ele ss remains that i t has been li f e and in

tel ligen ce wo rking th rough per fect law an d o rder
84 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

w eighte d down by a l oad of sin sin which he ,

real ize d was l a rgely of his own making sin ,

which h e associat e d with diseas e of his body sin ,

which in tim e b ecam e d eath E verything in the

.

uni ver s e s eem e d to ful fil l its di vi n e purpos e but

hims el f E veryth ing re s pond e d to th e l a ws o f
.

li fe b ut hims el f H e a l on e was an o u tcast in

.

reb ellion Th rough his con sciou s thou ght a c

.
-

tion h e fille d his mi n d with all kind o f f alse

me ntal pict ure s H e not o n ly poison e d h is mind
.
,

b ut th e m e n tal poison b e cam e phy s i cal and his,

ea rthly habitation b ecame u nfit to l ive in Th e .

soul took flight and the body ret urn e d to the

,

eleme n ts from whe n ce it cam e .

Th ro ugh n u mb er l e ss l i ve s this st o ry has b een

repeate d ove r and over again With each s u c
.

ceedin g l ife cam e a g le am of hop e that th e re

might b e b etter con d iti ons in sto re b u t each s u c

,

ceedin g l ife b r o ugh t o n ly k ee n er disappointm e nt .

E ach l ife add e d s om ethi n g to th e count le s s de

s t ru cti ve s ub co n s cio u s picture s of th e past
-
.

Wh e n w e con s id er h ow th e mind of man is in

flu en ced by e xt ernal pas s ion and u n real though t
pict ure s is it to b e won dere d at that age s of
, ,

fal s e thinking shoul d only fin d exp re ssion in

d eath ! I s i t st range that physical de ath sho u ld
be th e re s u lt ! Al lt rue o r fa l s e things all t r ue
,

o r fal s e feel ing m u s t find physical express ion

, .

Th ere has b ee n a n ever ending conflic t in the

-
 Th e M in d s B ook Life
’
o f 85

mind o f man— th e soul within trying to fin d ex

p r ession th e mind infl ue nc ed by th e fo rm of
,

things witho ut a n ever endi ng e ff o rt towa r d

— -

adj u stm ent gaining at on e point and appa rently

, ,

losing at another Thu s th e st ru ggle has gone

.

on man returning over and over again f rom

,

th e Fo urth Dim ensional wo rl d to ren e w th e bat

tl e o f life in a v ain e ff o rt to b u ild fo r hims elf
,

a habitation that wo ul d b e an end uring on e In .

a f ew sh o rt ye a r s he h as passe d o u t again
th ro ugh th e gateway o f d eath with anoth er de ,

f e a t w ritte n into his s u b conscio u s mind

-
.

H is s ub consciou s mind has b ee n fi lle d with

-

on e d e fe at aft er anoth er y et th ere has b ee n a

,

p er sist e nc e a p er s,ever anc e that wi ll n,ever c e as e

u nti l man has gaine d the victory over sin and
d e ath Th e wa r fa r e is going on j u st as m u ch
.

as i t did age s ago on ly th e li ght is growing

,

b right er B e cau s e al ong with all th e evi l with

.
,

a ll th e sin o f l ife th at has b een w ritten into the

s ub consciou s mind th ere has b een somethi n g
-
,

els e w ritt en something o f what man is at h ea rt

, ,

som e thing of t ru e M anh ood A l ittle of th e .

image and liken e ss has b ee n di cl os e d on ly a

s —
little but e no ugh fo r th e p roph etic eye to se e
,

th e fu tu re that awaits th e full g rown man -

.

Life has tak e n on a n e w m e anin g Th e wo r m .

o f th e d u st has c e as e d to b e Th ere is a da wn
.

i ng consciou sn e ss where in man is b e ginn i n g to

86 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

l ook upon hims elf a s th e crown i n g work of

God s creation o f the world in which he lives
’
, .

H is l ife is b eing fill e d with a new hop e There.

i s the anticipation of th ings to come I t is as

.

though he w ere about to ente r a springtime of

life whe re eve rything should be made new Th e .

n ewn e ss will be m ad e manif e st by a n e w l ight

.

being thrown on th e way of life Man i s com

.

in g to s ee that the old ways an d means can n e v e r

express etern al life ; that his mind cons ciousnes s
rather tha n his sense nat u re mus t gi v e him

light ; that his soul m u st have fu ll and fre e e x

pre ssion if life in the body is to be prolonged
, .

H e is b e ginning to s ee whe rei n h e was at fa u lt

—
in his though t picture s in th e p a st that a ll th e
-

imaginative thought pictu re s h e had conce rning

-

hims elf wer e untrue ; that the on ly law of s in

and de ath was form e d in his own extern al con
s ciou s n es s
, b ro ught out by his own mentality
that th e re is a r e al law of life an d that through
,

knowl e dge and conformity t o it wi l l come the

consciou sne ss of ete rnal life .

H is tho ught picture s in the futu re wi ll sp ri n g

-

from his innat e qualiti e s H e wil

. l realize that
the life and intelligenc e within him i s universal ;
that he is one with all power ; that unto h im
h as b een gi ve n st rength to o v erc ome every
wrong condition that ha s re sult e d from his
wrong or partial tho u gh t p ictu ring of th e pa st
-
.
 The M in d s B ook Life 87
’
o f

He will wri te in to his n ew b ook o f li fe hea lth ,

an d s tren gth E very th ought p icture h e c rea tes

.
-

in life will be on e f or th e up b uilding of th e -

bo dy H e willsubdue al
. lthe extern al pa ssi on s
t h rough an outflow from the hea rt of li t e
real pas sion o f livin g In stea d of being ruled
.
,

a s h e has been in th e pa s t he wi l l be ruler over

,

all thin gs Al l th in gs will become s ubj e ct to

.

him .

Thi s is n o dream or i ll u sion It is absolute .

truth When man rea lizes that he i s the son o f

.

God h e willlive a God like life H e will make

,
-
.

u s e of every po wer o f so ul an d e v ery facul ty ,

o f min d H e will enter into the real joy of

.

living Th e partial life with all its de fe cts an d

.
,

w eakne s ses will be left b ehind and man will

, ,

ente r con sciously into his real i n he ritance .

Th e New World will be as open and free to

h im as is the Old World now I t wi ll not b e .

n eces sa ry fo r him t o pass through th e gateways

of bi rth and death bu t h e wi l l li ve an e ndle ss

,

life There will be n o more pain and so rrow

. .

Th e mind wi l l go on ev er e xpanding kn owing , ,

an d exp r essing m ore and mo re o f th e wonder

an d gl o ry that awai ts th e en l ight en e d mind .

 TH E FO URTH DI M E NS IO N

There are rat es of vibra tion produci n g sound

too low or too high fo r the h uman e a r to hear .

There are rates of v ib ration p r od u cing col o r too

rapid or too s low fo r the h uman eye to see .

Bu t because we do not hear th e high or low

s ounds or see the color produce d by rapi d or
,

slow color vib ration it doe s not follow that

,

th ey do n ot exist . Th e sp e ct r oscope i s unable

to get color beyon d the u ltra violet yet color
,

vib rati ons continu e Th e ear cannot hear the

.

trees and flow ers grow but that they do pro

,

duce a ha rmony of so und in growing i s as cer

tain as that our own physical growth can be ,

th rough i t s b l ood vib rations and m u scular ac

tion h e a rd by th e e ar when aided by delicate
, ,

inst rum ents Pre vious to H arvey s discovery

.
’

of the circu lation o f th e blood a p rimiti ve man

may have h ea r d the sou nd produce d by it s cir
culati on by ho l ding a s e a sh el l to his car but
,

he had no knowledge of the meaning o f the

sound he hea rd If a p rophet had ari s en at the
.

b eginni n g of th e ninet eenth century and fore

88
 The F ou rth Dimen s ion 89

tol d the discoveri es an d i nv ention s that have

s ince become reali ti e s he would not on ly have
,

b ee n considered a false proph et but would have,

been se ized as a fit i nmate fo r a lun ati c asylum .

Yet we are on ly on th e bo r derland o f discove ry .

Sir Oli v er Lodge in a r ecen t magazi n e a r

,

ti el e gave it as his opinion that communication

,

h ad b e en establish e d b etw e en people livi ng in

th e body here an d thos e wh o as we s ay ha v e
, , ,

p ass e d o u t o f l
i fe
. Wha t Sir O liver L odg e
says and beli eve s is what a large n umbe r of
peo ple say an d beli eve I hav e met a gre at
.

many sincere men and women in the last tw enty

y e a r s who h av e ass ert ed in th e mos t positi ve
way th e truth o f s uch sta tem ents I have s een
.

the forms o f tho se wh o hav e passed ou t of this

life I have h e a rd thei r voic e s I have b een in
. .

conscious commu ni cation with them pe r sonally ,

!

i s a c ommon thing t o h e ar Th e wri ter has had

.

such an abundance of what h e c onsid er s p roof

that there is n o longer a qu estion i n his mind
concern in g th e tru th of such statem e nts .

There i s ho w ever one thing which he wish e s

, ,

to point out That i s that in nea rly eve ry case

.
, ,

the phenomena occu r wh en th e recipient of th e

impression is mentally abstracted from a con
s ciou s n es s o f exte r n al things Th e qu e stion
.

migh t n aturally arise in the mind wh eth er in

such states of abstra ction it i s pos sible fo r the
.
go A New H eaven an d a New E arth

soul or mi nd to s ee into or go to an other worl d ,

or wheth e r th e on e wh o h as p as sed away i s on

this plane o f b eing At thi s point I come to

.

what s e ems to me to be o f vital importan ce .

Granting that a soul continu es to exist after the

physical form ha s been laid as ide whe re d oe s
,

i t go ! Does it go t o another world ! O r d oes

it continue to li ve on in this one !
Is it n ot m ore than possibl e is it n ot m or e
,

than probable that the re is a Fourth Dimen

,

si on to which ou r eyes hav e not b e en opened ,

and th at o u r s o call e d dead are li ving in thi s

-

world an d that through our own d evel opmen t

,

communication with th em will com e ; that thi s

n ew world is all around and abo ut us and is a ,

wo rld of an infinite variety of color and sound ;

that it is nature s great vacation g roun d ; tha t
’

w e enter it at s o called death ; th at in reality

-

there is neither bi rth no r death b ut that dying

,

i s but the passing into a l a rge r life and birth

,

an e ff o rt to exp re ss exte rn ally some of th e won

der and glory of that which w e now call th e
Undiscov e red Coun t ry ; that in this Fourth Di
men s ion al l othe r dimensions exist b ut varyin g
,

in degre e and not in kind ; that length b readth , ,

and thickn ess exist as m u ch as they do in our

th ree dimensional worlds but that we are n ot
,

able to see them o r know them b e cau se th e rate

of vibrati on is s o high that th e physical eye an d
92 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

again the ideal has stri ven to manifes t i tself

in ou t er form on and up from the lowe st to
,

the highest th rou gh mine ral plant anima l and

, , , ,

man a n eve r ce asing climb Th e highly civiliz e d

,
-
.

a re now beginning to pe r ceive the action of th e

law and th rough this pe rception will com e a
,

conscio u s eff o rt to co operate with the law O ne

-
.

day of such co ope rati on will be as a thousand

-

ye a r s of the past J u st as the u nborn child n ow

.

recapitu lates th e whol e of ph ysical c r eation f rom

p rotopl asm up b e fo r e being born int o th is wo rld ,

so wil l the conscio u s ly li ving man be abl e to

accomplish in on e l ife what h as taken a thou sand
li v es to gain in the past .

W e a re li ving at a pace to day fa r beyond -

that of th e past We c rowd more into one y e ar

.

than ou r fo re f ath er s did into a lif etime Thi s .

is no less t rue of mind and thought than it is

of th e mo re ext ernal evi dences of ste amsh ips ,

expre ss trains wi rele ss telegraphy and a h un

, ,

d re d an d on e oth er things we might en u merat e .

Notwith s tan ding this st ren u o u s l i f e an d th e ,

wea r and te a r on brain and m u scl e th e average ,

y e a r s of a man s li f e d
’
u ring the last fifty yea r s

have st e adily inc reased and will go on in cre a s

,

ing u nti l at last in the fu lln e ss o f tim e an d

, ,

knowl edge h e wil l hav e consci ously triumphed

,

over d e ath and the g rave .

B u t to r e tu r n to the question of a Fourth

 Th e F ou rth Dimen s i on 93

Dime n sion . pe rson may poss e ss facts

On e
abo ut things i n thi s life of which other pe rsons
have no kn o wledge yet he can make a tho ught
,

picture f or them of those things s o cl e ar that

they wi l l have no di fficulty in grasping his mean
i ng B u t his thought pictu re will all b e d rawn
.
-

in t e rm s o f a thre e dimensional world abou t

-

th i n gs in that world and so th rough cont rast

,

and compa ri son he is able to make himse lf

thoroughly understood B u t suppose he wished
.

to desc ribe in o rdinary terms some extraordi

n a ry inn e r f ee ling which h e had expe rienc e d ,

bu t which the oth e r pe rsons had not No .

a m oun t of cl e ar thought pict u ring could dis -

close that feeling to them becau s e he co u ld not ,

make them experien ce it th rough h is des crip

ti on H is three dimensional te rms woul d be in
.

a d eq uat e to describ e a fo ur dimensional s e nsa -

tion Neve rtheless though he could d raw no

.
,

pa rallel to i t in l e ngth b re adth and thickn e ss

, , ,

th e feeli ng would be j u st as r ea l t o hi m as any

thing h e could tou ch hea r or see , , .

Thu s fe eling is a facto r that cannot be meas

,

u red by anything in the e xt e rna l wo rld G rant .

in g th a t this i s s o we find that th e s o cal l e d

,
-

phy sica l man o f sense live s in a wo rld wh ere

everyth i ng is pictured by th e mind B ut the r e .

is an other part o f man s b eing through which

’

he feel s but does n ot picture and this part o f

, ,
94 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

him ha s an even greater i n fl uen ce on his life

than mind an d though t .

With our three dimension s we meas ure man s ’

outer wo rld b ut we hav e n o measure fo r his

,

infinity of feeling Yet i t is f e eling that ani

.

mate s eve rything in our three dimen sional -

wo rld and eve rything i n i t h as ta ken form an d

,

b e come what it is becau se o f what h as been felt .

Th e p erception o f a Fo u rth Dimension i s dawn

ing on man s consciou sn e ss through his interior
’

feelings and th rough such pe rception will come

,

Li f e E t ernal .

If to know G od i t i s necessary to be like Go d ,

and God is the Spi rit of Lov e then th rough ,

Lov e shall we ent e r into the full kn owledg e of

th e Fo urth Dimension an d there shall be n o ,

d eath in this New World For it i s a New .

Wo rld though ol der th an al

, lthe three dimen -

s ion a l wo rlds Becaus e of it an d by it an d

.
, ,

th rough it came al l worlds But to the i n di vi d

, .

u al who consciou sly enters it allbecomes n ew , ,

and th e s o called o l d things pa s s away

-
.

N0 one can s ee thi s wo rld th rough an other s ’

eyes but m u st enter it for himsel f through b e

,

ing bo rn again n ot o f flesh nor of b l ood n or

, , ,

o f the wil l of man ; but by and th r ough th e

indi vi dual wi ll becoming one with the Universal

Wi l —
l o r th e realization that Love Fa ith H ope , , ,

an d Joy ar e greater t h an all else F or .

 The F ou rth Dimen s ion 95

you are ‘

n ot in the flesh i f so be th at th e Spiri t

o f G od — —
Lo ve l i ves in you ; neither do you have
a carnal or a th ree dimensional mi n d which
,
-
, ,

lives on ly in the form of things ; but a perfect

four fold mind Spirit So u l M ind an d S en s e
-
, , , , ,

o f all o f which t he body is only an exp r ession .

Universal Love and H ope and Faith are not

, ,

mea s u red by time or space and the refore the ,

indi v idual li ving in them cannot di e b ecause th e ,

mind is c e nt ered in the Uni ver sal not in a —

world of change but in th e Ch an gel ess Uni verse
,

o f Causat ion .

I realize that the min d which is only con

s ci o u s o f a th ree dime n s ional wo rld will insist
-

upon the necessity o f proving a Fourth Dimen

s i on by s cien tific met h ods B u t while I b e
.
,

lieve that eventually this will b e don e yet b e ,

fore i ts extern al demonstration of se eing or

h ea rin g i s accompli shed it cari only b e ap ,

p r oa c h ed b y i nsigh t There. a r e sugg e stions a l

l
thro u gh th ese lesson s wh i ch if followed will , ,

bri ng the n eces sa ry in sight An d h ere I wo uld .

l ike to say that th ere are many people l iving in

the body wh o to a greater o r less degre e hav e
, ,

realized the truth o f the New World which e x

i s ts here an d n ow an d have found i t g reater by
,

f a r than the on e kn own th r ough o ur physical

sen se s ; on e that i s always light on e wh ere fo rms ,

exist , more ethereal an d more beautiful than

96 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

those we s ee in the body ; on e wh ere locomotion

i s a question of thought ; on e i n which one goe s
at will where h e wills t o go and in the goi n g ,

seems to fly y et not with wings ; an d whe re

,

natural fo r m o ff er s no re sistance to the going

o r th e coming ; wh ere th e wonder o f color an d
o f so u nd is al l abo u t yo u and yet so difli cul
, t
to desc r ibe as to make i t impossible to convey
to another mind m u ch mo re than I have w r itten ;
and y e t th e peopl e wh o have seen and he ard
,

and know of i t n ev e r forget it or think of i t a s

,

a d r eam b u t rathe r as a glo rious re ality

, If .

e v eryon e e l s e in the world w er e to rise up a n d

d e ny th e t ru th of its existence th eir absolu te
faith woul d not fo r a singl e instant be changed .

Th ey mig ht say lik e Pa ul : , Whether in the

body o r ou t of th e body I kn ow not ; bu t t h is
I do know that I s aw an d heard such thi n gs
,

a s a re not possible t o utt er .

Littl e by little this inner world i s bei ng ma d e

mani fe st in th e o u ter Th e great musician s
.
,

compos ers paint ers poets an d others who have

, , ,

se en much o r littl e into it have tri e d to depict

som e of the colo r and sound glory of this Fou rth
Dim ension of ou r o wn wo rld Th e w o rld i s .

n ea ring a stage in its development when s u ch

kn owl edge will be come rathe r common p ro perty .

Sometim e s whe n we intently study a land

scap e painted by a mast er th e mind be comes s o
,
 The F ourth Dimen s ion 97

en rapt ured by it s world of c olor its high lights ,

an d its low l i gh ts th e won derful t echn ique o f

,

it one feels the soul o f the arti st speaki ng

,

thr o ugh hi s wo rk Th e que s tion may then ari s e

.

a s t o whether th e art wa s n ot more beautiful

than Nature her self I f you could a s k the.

pai nte r he would tell you th at he saw an d felt

mo re than he wa s able to pai nt that while h e ,

wa s able to impart s o meth in g o f the sym metry

o f form an d s om ething of the wo n der o f col or
,

to his can vas yet he h ad mis s ed far mo re than

,

—
h e was able t o p ai n t th at Nature was filled
wi t h a wonde r and mystery o f soun d an d color
t ran s cen di n g an yth in g h e mi gh t try to de
pict .

Wh en a great composer finish es a wonde rful

compo sition on e m ay thi n k that he has touched
the high water mark of hi s inspi ration But
-
.

i f on e could r ead h is thought and feel what he ,

feel s on e would kn o w that he hear s harmoni e s

,

o f far great er gran deur th an he ha s been able

to expre ss Th rough experience eve ry great

.

mas ter adds t o his possession s a more v ivi d ,

wo rld of s ound an d color Opens to h is i nner

si ght an d h eari ng an d by an d by he come s to
,

s ee tha t wh at he h as s een an d fel t an d heard

h as its co un terpart all abou t him Wh at h e .

i nwardly disce rned Natu re revealed to him in

,

out e r form and color Neve r thele ss th e fi rst

.
,
98 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

discov ery was an inn e r on e even i f the man i fes ,

tation late r was fo und wi th out .

It is possibl e to he r e and n ow ente r i nto th e

Fourth Dimension witho ut un dergoing physi ca l
death but on e m ust ha ve a p reliminary p repa
,

ration in order to do so Th rough desi re and .

m e ditati on and b eing able to s o contro l th e mind

,

that on e can shut out all the o uter consciousne ss

of things one may come to percei v e the r eali ty
,

o f th e inne r w or ld H a v ing once b ee n s u ccess

.

ful i n doing this the th ought o f death a s it ha s

, ,

hith erto p resente d its elf wil l leav e the mind , .

If fea r of any ki nd exist s it wi ll only b e th e

one that som e peopl e hav e o f t he pain experi
en ced in passing out B ut eve n this shou ld b e
.

almost if not enti rely blotted out fo r they have

, ,

th e knowl e dge that i n passing i nto the e ternal

life consciousness i t was with a gr eat sen se o f
,

pleas ure and happiness th ere fore in th e fin al , ,

passing why sho uld the re b e pain ! I am in

,

cl in ed to t hi n k tha t the peopl e wh o pa ss out

s t r uggl ing and in pai n are th os e wh o cling
closely to t his life and who d esire to remai n
,

he re in th e body I b elieve too and most stati s

.
, ,

tics ve rify it that a l arge number of pe ople pas s

,

o u t of th e s o cal le d physical e xistence wi th ou t

-

struggl e o r pain b e cau se I bel i eve th at th ei r

,

ea r s and eye s a r e ope ned t o the world bea uti

ful that they a re abo ut to e nter be fore they h ave
1 0
0 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

wi th those who have been remove d fo r a time

from our midst .

I wish to say that I kn ow the truth of this .

Th e veil that s epa rates us f r om those who ha v e

passed from ou r v ision and hea ring is a very
thin on e I t may be lifted fo r many who a re
.

l i ving h ere in th e body to see H e that hath

.

eyes to s ee let hi m see

, .
!
 TH E DI S COVERY O F A NEW WORLD
W e are living i n a un iverse filled with w on der
a n d mys t ery and t he deeper we pen etrat e in to
,

its sec ret s the more wonderful an d mysteri ou s

it be come s M an is bathed in an in fin it e ocean
.

o f vibrati on bu t o n ly to a li mit ed d egree d oe s

,

he feel its pul s ati on H e comes in touch with

.

sound vib ration taking place in the wo rld s at

,
’

mos ph ere th rough the u se of his ea rs ; with

,

ligh t and color vib ration through th e use of

his eyes ; wi th elect ri c and heat vib r ation th r ough
the sense of touch But the re a re countless
.

other ki nds an d degree s o f vib ra tion regi st e red

by th e spect roscope of which h e is i gn o rant ,

n ot only of thei r use bu t of t heir ki nd In fact

,
.
,

a s yet he i s only on the borde rland o f kn owledge

concerning vib ration .

E ve ry rat e or o rde r of vi b rati on in the u n i

ve rse must fill some n eed Al lene rgy must ful
.

fill some purpose I t i s possibl e tha t in yea rs t o

.

come ou r knowledge of vib ration will have so

inc r ea sed that that which is un kn own to d ay
will be fully di s cl o sed .

I t i s n ot my w is h to enter in to or di scuss th e
 0
1 2 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

principles or cha racter o f the kn own o r unkn own

vib ration s S uflice it t o say that the vibrati on s
.

i n the ext ernal universe are fulfilling thei r crea

tive wo rk and pu rpose I wish rathe r to b ring .

out somet hing tha t he reto fo re has be e n l a rgely

ove rl ooked that is that all vib rations witho ut

, , ,

cor re spond to vib rations taking place wi thin th e

li fe of man ; that the re a re harmon i ous vib r a
ti ons constantly at work c r eating renewing , ,

building up ; and tha t there a re disco r dant vi

b ration s in life di si nteg rati n g de stroying an d , ,

tearing down .

On th e force an d direction f rom within de

pen ds the outcom e M an s menta l vib r ation co r
.
’

responds to the ea rth s atmosph ere whe r e s oun d

’
,

vib rations take place wheth er di sco rdant o r ,

harmoni ou s One ki nd of m ental atmo sphere

.

i s made up of storm of thund er and lightn ing, ,

a dest ructive vib ration which brings about physi

c al disintegration dest roying th e very habita
,

ti ons the bodi es in which we liv e The re i s

, , .

s t ill anoth er kind of though t atmosphe r e vibra

tion that is altogeth er c reati v e beca u s e man is ,

in a stat e of hopeful exp e ctancy picturi ng ,

thoughts which later on be come ext ern al ized in

form .

But the mind s atmosphere i s as va ri able as

’

the w e ath er in the wo rld s atmos phe re I t is ’

.

only wh en we come t o eth e ric vibration that .

1 0
4 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

s oul is p roduci ng the elect ric heat light an d , , ,

color vibrations all of which belong to th e

,

etheric or h eavenly vib rati ons As vib ration b e .

gi n s in the cente r of the soul i t moves out in

harmony with th e laws o f all etheric vib rati on ,

an d b e c ome s an etern al c re ative p r oce ss in life ,

gene rating eve ry element n e cessary to p e rfe ct

health preserv ing an d sustaining life con
, ,

s ciou s ly vib r a t ing f rom wi th i n wi t h t he e ther ic

vib ration without .

Wh en etheric vib rati ons rule man s life will ,

’

become as ete rnal a s eth e ric v ib ration an d he ,

will go on from one octave of life to anothe r ,

ever knowing and eve r b ecoming ; enteri n g into

wonde r s an d place s of which the mi nd n ow can
have no conception .

Th er e a re many m en an d w omen li ving in

the wo rld now wh o can kn owingly generat e
magn etic an d el e ctric vibrations and who are ,

unconsciously gen erating light and colo r vibra

tions but th e proc e ss is not as yet a conti nuou s
,

on e .At p re s en t it h as its high an d i ts l ow

tide s and b ecaus e of thi s the disintegration o f

,

th e b o dy o r form must c on tinue A consciou s .

relation o f i nn e r v ib rati on must eventually give

the soul a habitati on or a body that i s etern al
, ,

i n the heavens .

It h as take n m an a long tim e to di scover an d ,

h e s ee s bu t dimly ye t that unto him have been

,
 The Dis covery o f a New World 1 05

g ive n t h e key s of l i fe and d e a th D isc or d

.an t
v ibra ti on s set up i n hi s own l i fe produce di s ,

ea s e an d death I f the min d vibrate s to soul

.
,

o r etheric vibration th e body will become e the

re aliz ed an d will n o longer b e diseased or su ff e r
,

p a i n. We sh a ll en t er in to the Four t h D i m ension

o f s pace where it is etern ally light an d the re
, ,

w illbe n o more nigh t Space will be an n ih i

.

la t ed . It will only be necessary to think an d the ,

b o dy w il l at once respon d to the min d Time .

wi l l b e no mo re .

I believ e with all my heart an d mind that

th e s e things a re t rue and th at they will be
,

realized by some pe rhaps at no very dist ant

,

d at e For this r eason m an s mind is b e ing cen ’

.

tered on h is own li fe hi s pow e rs and possi, ,

b il ities as h as neve r b ee n done in the past .

R ealizing a s of necessity he must d o soon that

, ,

al l his inventi on s a re patterned or take form

a ft er hi s own m ind th at ev e rything he c re at es
,

in th e outer wo r l d bu t symboliz e s something

g re a t er i n hi s o w n life he will
, no long e r d e ny
h is birthright but enter i nto th e i nheritance that
,

h as been hi s f ro m the beginning .

I do n ot by an y mean s expect that the ma

j y
o r it o f pe o ple w h o re a d t his b oo k will accep t
my con clusion s b ut I do beli eve that there a re
,

man y pe ople livi ng in the body now wh o will

n ot on ly a cc ept bu t will live to prove the st ate
,
1 0
6 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

ments which I am submitting t o thei r mind s

an d h e art s Neverth e l e ss if no one w ere to
.
,

a ccep t th e se things as being t r u e my faith would ,

i n no degree be weaker be cause they have b ee n ,

reveale d to me and although I may not b e abl e

,

to m ake my revelations clea r to oth e r min ds I ,

am absolutely convin ced in my own mi nd o f

thei r truth .

M os t of these ch apters a re d evote d not s o

much to proving the t ruth of th e Fourth Di
men s ion as they a re int e nde d to show a way
,

o f ent e ring into a conscious kn owl e dge o f i t I .

am w ell awa r e of the fact that b e fo re such un

ders tan din g co mes there must be th e n e c e ssa ry
p repa ration Th e s eed which falls by th e way
.

sid e upon the rocks or among the tho rns an d

, ,

b ria rs is not going t o b ring fo rth fruit Only

, .

th e s ee d that falls upon the ground prepare d

for i t will b ring forth fruit afte r its kind som e ,

tw enty some sixty and some on e hund red fold

, , .

H e th at hath eyes shall se e and he that h ath ,

ea r s shall h ea r what th e spiri t s ayeth .

E th e ric or soul vib ration is establish e d at th e

, ,

center of b eing in ou r l i ve s L ov e is th e gre at . .

white light wh i ch when analyzed by th e spec

, ,

tr um disclos e s the s e ven p rismatic colo rs o f

,

Faith H ope Joy Peace P ow e r Ge ntl enes s

, , , , , ,

Go odn ess Against s uch there is no l

. aw One .

octave o f this sca le achieved an othe r disclo ses ,

1 0
8 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

the world Now there are many man y m in ds

.
,

wo rking together fo r the sam e end an d purp os e ,

an d every soul added to this number m ake s it

ea sie r fo r each an d al
lto realize his hea rt s d e
’

s1re .

No this is n ot an illu so ry dream bu t a visi on

, ,

of life an d t ruth and one that shall be re alized

,

in fact Let the wise old world look amused

.

o r bored and think only of th e writer as a

,

d reame r of d reams bu t the re a re th o se on th e

,

bo rderland of the New World that know an d

a re list ening fo r the new song o f life an d ,

st raining their eyes for the fi rst vi sion o f a

p romise d land I t will be th rough the mind s
.
’

adjustm ent of the outer self to th e inner life

that th e fruit of th e Tree of Life shall come .

It will b e b e ca us e th e inner de sire is awake n e d

that through th e gat ew ay of meditation a ligh t
will be th rown on th e way o f lif e .

Ye s th e time d raws nigh when the Kin gd om

,

o f Go d th e Kingdom o f H e aven will n o l o nger

, ,

be an undiscove red count ry but on e we may ,

en te r at wil l an d r eturn lad en with ri ches to

, , ,

c re at e a mo re b e autiful s oul sati sfying ea rth

,
-
.

We shall b e come consciou s worke r s wi th Go d .

and shall then establ ish H is Kin gdom on

earth .

Desi re to kn ow an d desi re to be is th e first

,

step to the unlocking o f the mysteri e s o f th e

 The Dis covery f
o a New World 1 0
9

K i n gdom ofGod Ea ch mus t fin d the way of

.

L i fe , and must walk therein , i f he would come

i nt o the rea l freedom and growth o f life De .

sire th at is related to feelin g, rather than desire

tha t concerns its elf in th e po s session o f things ,

will g iv e us th e etern al riche s of life .

Desi re l e ad s to m edi tation o r that condi tion

,

wh ere mind a s we understand it is at its lowest

, ,

sta te o f activity an d the consciousn ess of all ex

,

te rna l th ings ha s pass ed away ; whe re the soul is

fi ll e d wi th an e cs tasy o f fe eling ; wh ere I n divid
u alSoul an d Unive r s al Sp i ri t blen d in th e on e
,

n e ss of Lo ve an d Li fe .

I t i s by this mean s that we enter into the

K ingdom o f Go d whe re life i s etern al
, An d .

h ere the soul lea rns to vi brat e with th e Sou rce

o f its Be i ng ; f rom this un ion com e s all that in

n e r vib ra ti on that later mingles wi th an d b e

comes p art o f the outer ethe ric vib r ation .

Al la round an d abo u t u s is th e New World

th at un discov e red count ry But our eye s a re
.

d im an d our ea rs are dull and we do not s e e ,

a n d we d o not hear Al la round and about us

.

a re th o se we lov e fo r whom we are s o rrowing

,

a s on e without hope Yet th ey have not l e ft

.

u s for an other wo rld They have ente re d fo r a

.

s ea so n int o a l arger life t h rough the st airway

o f death . In the fullnes s o f t ime they will re

tu rn laden with riches to m ake a more b eauti ful
, ,
n o A New H eaven an d a New E arth

earth . They wi ll
re en t er th rou gh the gat ew ay
-

o f birth .

Fo r countles s generation s bi rth an d death on e ,

following the othe r in quick succe s sion h ave ,

been going on in the wo rld Bu t at last man is .

asking hims elf the qu e s tion Wh y die !

What m ake s death n ec e ssary t o life ! Is it not
possible t o li v e without p assing through th e
po rtal of de ath ! M an will never res t satis
fied until th e s e ques tions are an s wered and n o ,

on e but man can answer the question s p ro

pounde d by man .

It is not an easy m atte r f or on e to describe

or t ell to oth er s much concern in g this New
Wo rld e ven if on e has en te red it because th ere
, , .

is s o li ttl e re s e mblanc e betw een it and th e o uter

wo rl d Th e rat e of vib ration is so great th at all
.

fo rms are mo re eth ere al yet eve n here the eu

,

light en ed mind is cloth e d in a f ar more ethereal

fo rm than th e unen lightened one There are .

octav e s o f b eing h ere wh e re people v ibrate to

eth eric vib ration s and lower octaves wh ere
, ,

p eopl e vibrate to condition s almost simi lar to

th e outer world .

In the Fou rth Dim en sion b odily s en sation ,

such as cold and h eat is un kn own Physical

, .

pain an d dise as e do n ot exis t Th e mind that .

ente rs into thi s life with all th e passi on s an d

earthly desi res al i ve i s somethin g l ike Ma
,
1 12 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

to be I do n ot kn ow whether i t i s pos s ible to

.

g o t o an other plane t o r n o t ; bu t th er e a r e plane s

in the Fo urth Di me nsion where i f I may so ex ,

p res s it the clouds come between i t an d the

,

outer worl d and apparen tly shut off all co m

,

mun ication Wh ether th is is so in fact I kn o w

.

n ot.

Perhap s o f the mo st remarkable experi

on e

en ces i s t he clearness of m ind an d thought Th e .

clearest thinking here i s dull by comparison with

thought there The r e i s a pleasure in thin king
.

the re that the mind n eve r expe riences when in

the physica l body An d th ere is a hearing o f
.

ha rmoniou s sound s almost un kn own in the

—
body o nly at tim e s when one h e ars the wo rks
,

o f g rea t compos er s sung or pl ayed by a m ast er

mind and even this i s only feeble in comp arison

,

to the wond er and melody of sound A part .

s eems to be the voic e of singers who sing as ,

n on e e v er did in the bod y and which may be

,

p roduce d by vib rations o f which w e kn ow n oth

ing h ere though i t may be the highly attuned
,

ea r catch e s the m e lo dy of the uni ver se Aga in .

colo r fo rm s a wonde rful pa rt Colors like an d .

,

yet unlike thos e which we are accu stomed to

,

seeing while in the bo dy Color that is opal .

e s cen t and that has a t ran sp aren cy a s th o ugh

,

on e could se e f ar f ar i nt o it , .

Do people eat and drink ! O f that I can n ot

 Th e Dis covery f
o a New World 1 13

speak with c e rtain ty I h ave an impression

. ,

however that whatever nouri shm ent i s requ i red

,

i s p rob ably taken th rough b reathin g because ,

th e fu n ction of the breath is u s ed in much th e

sam e way as we u se i t while in the bo dy Th e .

voice i s use d in speakin g but there is a l i ght

,

n e ss an d brigh tn ess f ar beyon d anythin g we

kn ow here .

I t is diffi cult to s ay much mo re becau s e it is

,

impossibl e to tran slate into written o r spoken

word s condition s in which there i s l ittle o r n o
an al o gy b etw een the things an d condi tion s in the
ex tern al wo rld .

There are a numbe r o f people here in the body

wh o have volun tarily or in voluntarily en tered
consciously in to thi s inner world and all tell ,

practically th e same story Th e little di ff erence s

.

would s e rv e rather to confirm than to ta ke away

fro m th e truth o f thei r e xperi en c e s as al lag re e
,

upon th e e ssen ti als Pe ople wh o have con

.

sciou s l y ent e re d i n to t he Fourth D i me n sion

kn o w th at what I have related is not on ly tru e ,

bu t t hat e verythi ng in that wo rld s o f ar s u r

passe s th e description which I have tri ed to gi ve
that either spoken or written wo rds con cerning
it s eem all inadequate to expre ss th e wonder an d
g l o ry o f this N ew World .

An d what is th e r e to gai n by m isstatements

ab o u t the se vital th i ng s o f life ! Pe rson ally I ,
1 14 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

should p refer not to write ab out things whi ch I

know the great majority o f m in d s will questi on .

Ye t re alizing tha t this stat emen t may p r ove

,

h elpful to some so rrowing soul I can no longer ,

re frain from making i t I n wri ting as I have

.

don e I hav e not re co r de d my belief but what ,

I kn ow an d before on e can speak kn owingly h e

,

must have had experi enc e This is a l e af out .

o f my p e rsonal expe ri enc e .

I know that we l i ve afte r we pass out of th e

physical body I kn ow that some conditions
.

a re as I hav e rep re sent ed them to be Bu t I .

do not for one m inut e p retend that ther e may

not b e a thousand o r fo r that matter t en thou
, , ,

sand other wonders and glo ri es of wh ich I kn ow

,

nothing I beli eve with Paul that Eye hath

.
,

not seen an d ear hath not h ea rd ; n ei the r hath it

,

entered into the h ea rt o f man to kn ow the ,

glori e s that have b een p repa re d for him L ife .

!

is a wonde rful thing and we are on ly beginn ing

,

to app re ciat e a littl e of its won der an d mystery .

But I b eli e ve that we s hall go on ever kn owing ,

and ever b e comi n g until at last we sh all unfold

,

to the p er fe ct image an d like ness of God wh ere ,

d eath and s in will be swallowed u p in vi cto ry .

1 16 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

puls e from the mind A beautifu l thing ap .

pea l s to u s and thinking th e posse ssion of i t

,

would en rich th e li f e we d e si re i t We ra rely

, .

stop to analyze th e inn er d e si re n everth el e ss it ,

i s an e ff o rt o f the b e au ti f ul within to relate it

self to the b eauti f ul w ithou t B ecaus e w e have .

the inn e r poss e ssion we wan t to make th e out e r

obj e ct ou r own as w ell Som etim e s d e si re for .

things in th e obj ecti v e wo rld come s not because ,

o f an innate desi re but becaus e of som e one

,

else s int erest in th em We a re apt to re spond

’
.

to som eone else s mind especially if i t i s an

’
,

th orita tive .

We s ee m en in the busin e ss wo rld st raining

every n e rv e to get poss e ssi on of this wo rld s ’

goo ds not b e cau s e of s om e re al o r fancied n ee d

, ,

but to ou tst rip o r at l e ast to equal som e on e else .

We see the de si re in every d epa rt m ent o f life

to imitate oth er s and to do in a la rger or more
,

successful way what som eone else is doing .

Imita tion on ly counte rfei ts It is never the .

sam e as th e o riginal You cannot put the real .

li f e o r spi rit o r soul into anything you imitate

, , .

Take for e xamp le the painting of a g reat mas

, ,

ter Peopl e copy it so that it is technically cor

.

re ct bu t when you l ook at the pictu re you say

, , ,

Ye s it is a good imitati on
, Bu t you a re n ot .
!

d ec eive d by it no matt er how t echnically per

feet it may b e The r e is nothing in th e copy
.
 Th e E vol
u tion f
o Desire 1 17

that in spi res you beca u se the pain ter h as imi

,

tated s o meone els e and has not put his own life
, ,

or though t or fullness int o th e pi ctu r e

, .

The re a r e ma ny objecti v e desi r es which ih ,

s t ead o f be ing b eneficial a r e d etrimenta l to ou r

,

un foldi ng Wh ateve r is done f rom the within

.
,

o r f r om the subjecti v e life to exp r ess a desi re ,

is be tt e r than an yth ing in the o ut e r wo rl d that

we can copy If we could get the though t thor
.

o ughl y insti lle d in th e mind that something we ,

a re inspired to do is bett er than anything we

could copy f r om anothe r w e should soo n c ome ,

t o know the real the tru e self , .

De si re is th e mind s p ray e r I f d esi re is cen

’
.

t ered in the accum u lation of things the ful ,

fil lrn en t of the d e si r e n ever b rings p er f e ct or

l asting satisfaction in life Things have th e i r .

p lace and u s e and, th e y should have b ut in the ,

p l a n o f l if e th e l e ss er m u st a l ways b e s u b o rd i
n a t e t o the g re ate r S o if w e plac e o u r aff ec
.

ti ons upon w orl dly things when w e posse ss ,

them all the re will stil l b e som ething l acking

, ,

for things a re changing and transito ry and may

at any time pass away We sha ll not b e con
.

tent ; we can not be happy be caus e w e have not ,

full y expre ssed ou rs elve s hav e not expre ss ed ,

th e fulfi llment o f inn er d e si re In other words .

we a r e onl y happy wh en we a r e doing c re ati ve

wo rk kn owing that it i s o u r wo r k to do that
, ,
1 18 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

we have th ough t it out that we have worked it

,

out p e rhaps n ot a s th o ro ugh ly as we sh oul d

,

have liked but as well as was po s sible at th e

,

tim e .

An yth i ng that we a cqu i re with ou t labo r can

never hav e the same val u e fo r u s as th at which
we ac qui re th rough eflort I f somethi ng c omes
.

to u s from o thers withou t efi ort upo n ou r pa rt ,

we h ave little appreci ati on of it Thi s is as it .

should be It proves to us that without e ff o rt

.

we d o n ot bri ng i n to ex iste nce that which is go

ing to make o ur own lives outwardly creatively ,

s t ro n g .

I f then the desi re i s placed in th e obj ecti ve

side of life we may realize it to the fulles t de
,

gree bu t have no s ense of satis faction i n the

,

realizati on What shall it profit a man i f h e

.

gain th e whole world and los e hi s own soul !

I do not m ean this in the accepted theological
sense but rather in th e sense that in our search
, ,

a fter objectiv e things we l o se sigh t o f th e so ul

side o f life We lose our souls beca u se the

.

mind is s o busily engaged tha t i t ha s n o tim e to

think of anything else It puts it s heart what
.
—
—
little h eart i t h as into the obj ecti ve li fe an d ,

lose s al lsight o f the subj e ctive Wha t will it .

profit u s if we gain eve rythin g i n the obj e ctive ,

an d fail t o find o urselves to kn o w o urselve s to

, ,

come i nto mo re in ti mate relation with sel f !

120 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

principal obj e ct of li fe Inste ad of bein g pos .

s essed by the highe st feeling of which w e are

capable we wan t to possess things ; and when
,

we poss e ss them th ey lose the v alu e with which

we had fo rm erly endowed th em If th ey w ere .

real things if we had th e real poss essions then

, ,

we should hav e al lthe o ther posse ssions n eces

sa ry to life as the greate r m u st o f nec e ssity
,

include that which i s l ess than itself .

Th e n th e sto ring up o f riches

, Th e rea l .

riches the mind s riches com e from th e soul the

,
’

, ,

inn er li f e and we sto r e up th e rich e s thus ac

,

qui red which late r shall b e n eeded for extern al

, ,

use I t is a p roc e ss we might say of mind

.
, ,

building— a regen e ration of th e mind ; a re

n e wal a making ove r a reforming of th e mind
, , .

Th e wo rd re f orm simply m ean s that if w e

!
,

a re dissatisfied wi th any form we may go t o ,

wo rk an d re fo rm it An d so the re is this re
-
.

n ewing or re forming of th e mind f rom th e

,
-
,

soul c enter thus c reating n ew thought pictu re s

,
-

of lif e ‘
.

Livin g pictu res o f life are i n one way external

‘

to ou r selve s We may d raw ou r picture from

.

n at ure , but it is only When the r e is an infl ux

from the o u l that it b ecome s a li v ing thing
i
.

To il l u s tr e : A paint er might outl in e with

pencil on can vas a pictu re he wished to paint .

I t would be compos ed of da rk lin es an d light

 Th e E vol
u ti on f
o Desire 1 21

spa ce s Now thi s would repres en t a men tal pic

.

tur e tha t h as n o so ulquality in it Lat er when .

,

the painter u s ed hi s colo r s the be auty o f the

,

pict ure would become evident So any an d cv .

ery men tal pictu re sh o u l d become illum i ne d by

the w onder and color o f the soul .

O ur li ves move in a ci rcle We come in .

touch wi th people on eve ry side Touching .

life in the true way or being adj usted t o it is

, ,

like the s un in its light and h eat radiations

th ey go ou t in every di rection It is all an o ut .

pouri ng fro m th e heart of life In u s ther e is .

th e s un at the heart of life th ere is the soul

,

th robbing with the desi re to gi ve I t is n ever .

a question of rec e iving but rather of gi ving

, .

A s th e sun gi v es of i ts warmth and light as th e ,

rain falls on the j ust an d on the unj u s t gi ving ,

ou t as w ell to the weak as to th e st rong as much ,

to the weed as to th e b ea utiful plant o r flow er ,

j u st as much to the s o cal led disagreeable things

-

o f lif e as t o t he ag ree able so do w e f rom

,

the soul cente r gi v e of l igh t an d life and lov e ,

wh en the so ul i s adj usted to life in the right

way .

If th ere is a h armonious gi ving at eve ry point ,

then it is throwing the life open for a per fe ctly

harmoni ou s re ceiv ing ; but if there is no thought
of gi v ing it is ju s t as though one hid hims el f
,

from the light of the sun and live d in a s tate of

,
1 22 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

darkn es s . We can determin e fo r ourselve s

whether o r n ot we a re go ing to be bles t by ev ery
infl uen ce in li fe because there i s n o such thing i n
,

reali ty as malevolen t influ ence Al li nflu e nce i s

.

for good but the way w e become related to i t a f

,

feets u s e ither for good or fo r il l I f we b e .

come related to an y c ondition o f life in only a

—
partial way that is i f the en d an d pu rpo se i s
,

for ou r own p e rs on al good wi thout re gard for,

the goo d of others then the influence brou ght

,

to bear on our li ves seems to be ma lign ant .

There i s n o fullnes s n o satisfacti on no happi

, ,

nes s flowing i n t o the life b e cau se we hav e made

,

a wrong adju stm en t where in it i s imp os sible

fo r u s t o be h appy Th e conditi on s have not

.

been made for us ; we made them con scio usly

or unc onsciously o u r s e l v es .

It is w ell too to remember that allou ter

, ,

thin gs ar e b ut symbols o f inner power and n o ,

full or pe rmanent s atisfaction can come th rough

their po ss e ssion Up to a ce rtain stage we
.
,

n ee d symbols ; th ey a re o f importanc e t o us ,

but only as st epping ston e s to th e real things o f

-

life It is like littl e child ren lea rning to c ount

. .

They ha v e a blac kboa rd with difleren t figures

'

on it . Th e figures wri tten on the blackb oa rd

a re only symbo lic b ut the c hild fin ds i t n eces
,

sary to us e them in order to get the thought pic -

ture a s to what th ey m ean ; but by an d by when - -

1 24 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

what his posses sion s m ean We can never b e .

satisfied with things i f we fail to unde r stan d

what th ey mean They are n ot ev en ma t e ri al
.

riches : th ey are only symbols o f the real ri ches

o f l ife an d soo ner or later mus t l o s e thei r value
, ,

because we come t o know th at there is s ome

thing greater than an y outer thing But even .

th en we do not discard the outer thin g ; we use

i t i n so far as we can use it aright .

An y d e si re that i s plac e d in the obj ecti ve wi ll

bri ng it s ful fillmen t if st e adfastly held to O ne .

ca n e nt er into the poss essi on o f things through

d e si r e but the life is n ot m ade rich e r be caus e

,

of such poss essi ons Life becom es narrowe d or

.

limit e d by them wh en we fail to understan d their

use .

I have kn own people in thi s world kin d ,

h ea rted at on e time generou s wi th aspira tion s

, ,

fo r nobl e l i ves and I ha v e se en them allo w thei r

,

minds to become so c ente red on the accumula

tion o f material w ealth that little by littl e th e
,

soul side of li f e gave way so tha t the genero u s

-
,

condition o f mind tha t at one time s e emed to ex

ist at last disapp e are d even kindly though t
, , ,

kindly feeling and n oble aspi ration all seemed to

pass away I s ay s e emed to because th at is
.
,
!

all it did We never los e an y real qu ali ty we have

.

onc e possess ed I t is impo s sible to lose it Peo

. .

pl e n ever retrograde The r e is no such thing in

.
 Th e E vol
u tion f
o Des ire 1 25

l
ife as retrogression .E verything is t ending
from a l ower to a h igher condition .

B u t on e may s ay pe ople ha ve been kn own to

, ,

lea d upright li ve s up to a certa in peri od in life ,

an d th en do something which app ea r s to undo

all t hat th ey have accomplished in the past Al l .

m to have be en undone by th e evil thing ,

and we call th at a ret rograd e mov em ent It is .

n oth i ng o f the ki nd .Al lthat w e ha ve gain e d

in t he pas t a l l th at we h ave acqui re d is o ur s fo r
, ,

al l e ternity an d n o on e can take i t f rom us

,
.

Bu t this is what occurs in such ca s e s : p eop le

g o a l o ng
, perhaps ov e r c o ming this thing or t hat ,

an d then reaching some gr e at er obstac le with ,

st r en gth of mind en ough to o ver com e i t but ,

n o t using t ha t necessary st rength and thus go

,

in g down be fore i t . This do es not m e an that

th e y have lo st any o f th e past accumulations ,

b u t that th ey ha v e n ot p rov en th ems elve s suf

fi ci e n t fo r th e g reate r ta sk by which th ey w ere
co n f r onted ; th ey have no t b r o u ght st re ngth of

mi n d and soul to bear on th e p roblem and for ,

th e time being they a r e d e f e at e d . H ow ever this ,

i s n othing in th e nature of a p erman ent d e fea t ,

f o r s oone r o r late r th ey wil l have to tak e up

tha t probl em again an d work i t ou t they must
conquer in th e en d .

You migh t as k the que sti on : Why can we

not l ose the good we hav e onc e acqu i re d ! B e
1 26 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

c aus e in acqui ring the good there is an in fl ux

,

from the so u l t o the mind which anima tes al

, l
o u r life pict u r e s gi ving life t o a l l o ur thoughts
, .

Who can ru b out any on e of the thought pic -

tu re s that have been fo rmed in life ! Did you

ever t ry to se parat e you rs el f f rom a thought or ,

to s epa rat e the thought fro m you r mind ! I t

cannot b e don e Th e thing is i mpossibl e You
. .

may as w ell talk o f s epa rating a ray f rom the

s u n as o f sepa rating a thought f rom you r m ind .

We l i ve rem ember in ou r tho ught pi ctu re s in

, ,
-
,

all that we have li ved i n th e past all that we ,

have be en and a l l that w e have exp resse d ; and

wh en w e hav e p er fecte d any th ough t picture -
,

that live s on in the li fe as a pe r fec t

poss e ssion and th ere is n o power i n hea v en
,

o r e arth that can take i t from u s We .

may lose all things bu t we can neve r lo se the

,

riches sto re d up in th e mind ; th ey have becom e

o u r p erman e n t poss e ssion . Th e hea v ens an d
the e arth may pass away bu t th e Wor d of
,

Love in us mus t abide fo rever Th e false

.

tho ught pictu ring that is going on i n the con

-

s cious mind may for a tim e di stract our a tten

tion from the good we ha ve accumulated in th e
past b ut even false thought picturin g in the
,
-

mind is only in a partial way th e eff ort o f life to

exp re ss its el f It is not a pe r f ect eff ort because
.
,

it does not get perfect di rection When ever .

1 28 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

should only be the stepping ston es to a h igh er

-

an d truer kn o w l edge of life Looked at from

.

that point o f view j udgmen t an d condemnation

,

leave th e mind You no longer judge you rself

.

fo r any wrong thing you ha ve done or anything

l e ft undon e and not j u dgi ng yourself you ca n
, ,

have n o judgm ent for oth e rs You may have .

j udgment conce rning the act but not j udg ,

m ent that would mete con demn ation to an

other .

We kn ow th at s ome t hi ngs in li fe have

brough t us happiness and we kn ow that other
,

things in lif e hav e brought us unhappine ss Th e .

tru e j u dgmen t of the p rese nt would be to fol

low the course which brought us the happiness
and to put b ehind u s th e thing that b rought
us the unhappin e ss Th e j udgm ent then o f th e
.
, ,

p resent woul d simply mean th e true adj ustm en t

to life That is real judgment There i s no
. .

j u dgmen t that conc e rns itself w i th the past or ,

the condemnation of life in th e past A l lcon .

demn ation in l ife is us eless : i t nev er brings any

good Th e cond emnation of one s sel f brings
.
’

with i t l at er physical su ff e ring This physical .

su ff er ing foll ows through our wrong atti

tud e of mind Because men tal ju dgment and
.

condemnation e xp re ss themselve s th rough phys

ical su ff ering it shoul d show us that thi s sta te
,

o f mi n d is not a nat u ral on e f o r al ln a tural o r

,
 Th e E vol
u tion f
o Desire 1 29

ig
r ht thin king bri n gs to the min d a s en s e o f
p e ac e ,an d a c o n diti o n o f hea l t h an d stren g th o f
body . I t i s the refore but a waste o f time to al
low th e mi n d to dwell in j udgm en t or in con
—
demn ation on any pa st act an ything don e or
l eft un done Th e past should o n l y be con s id
.

ered a s sh owin g u s a bett er way to a ct in the

p resen t .

L et us lea rn to h old in min d a clear well de ,

-

fined id e al o f what ou r li v es sh o uld be th en in ,

st e ad o f m aking th at i de al someth i n to tt i n
g a a

to ra ther let u s begin to live it a t once In this

, .

l ivi n g we may n ot rea ch that id eal at once but ,

t h e e ff ort to do s o wi l l bri ng us n ear e r to i t all

t h e ti m e We mu st lea rn to think well o f ou r
.

s el v e s to fee l tha t w e a re inspi red by th e high

,

e s t motives in all our acti ons and gi ve th e same ,

c redi t to oth e r people ; tha t th ey in th e ir way a re

d o ing eve rything possible to express th ei r ideals .

Wh at eve r we feel an d think concerning our

s e lv e s that we b e c om e
, .

Some five hundred years ago a mys tic wrote

Whate er thou lovest man th at to become thou must

’
, , ,

G o d i f th ou l
, ov e s t G o d d us t if t h ou l
, ove s t d u s t
, .

Whatever we love we becom e I f we have

, .

a love o f th e beauti ful th e n we will learn to s ee

beauty in eve ry thing an d in every person O n e .

130 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

can e t e h im self to the u n iverse an d real ize

r l
a

h i s onen e ss wi th every l i vi ng movin g thing , .

H e may en ter in to the joy into th e h appine s s

, ,

i nto the health an d strength o f it all I t is the .

on ly way to become at one wi th God an d m an ,

an d th e mo re we des i re it the m o re we bec o me

,

on e wi t h that wh i ch we desi re I t is an efi ort

.

on ou r part that we are making to r ela t e o ur

selves to the whole o f life through giving what

we have to give to life It is what we are gi vi ng
.

to the re st of li fe that make s us one with life .

I f we are givi ng love to it then we a re b ecom

,

ing one with all the love o f God s great un i ’

verse I f we are giving faith to all l i fe

.
,

though our faith we are becoming one with all

fai th .

No efi ort is requi red in th e recei vi ng

’
Al l .

e ff ort is in th e givin g God is m ore willing to

.

give than we are to receive Nev e rtheles s

.

through th e gi ving we o pen our minds to th e

grea t Spirit fo r receiving We can see the dif
.

ference between the obj ective desire an d s ub

j e ctive desire T
.h e objec t ive desire is to re

ceive the subj ective desire is to give In s ub

, .

j e ctive de s ire we do t he thing we will to d o ,

but we fin d that we h ave the ful fillment again

in that everything needful comes to us in a n at
u ral ord e rly way It come s to us because we
, . ,

have tak en th e right course E ach life t hen .

, ,
1 32 New H eaven an d a New E arth

happiness an d peace not the pl easure n o r t he

,

pain of the old sense o f touch but a harmoni

,

ou s rhythmica l e ff e ct in mind and bo dy

, . With
the desire or the hungering and th i r sting after
,

righteousness co mes the realiz ation in respo nse

,

to the p rayer.
 —
M E DITATI O N THE PATH TO POWE R

M e ditati on is the gateway to power Through .

this gateway we ent e r i n to a c ons cio u s nes s of

a new life . Th e h i ghest form o f medi tati on is
a c onsci ou s onenes s with the s ource o f all life .

It is not a state of men tal activity but rather a

,

ce ssa tion o f thought an d an entering into a new

,

world of fe e ling . Meditati on i s the last ste p

t oward a knowledge o f the Fourt h Dimension .

Th e fi r st step t ow ard meditation is a desire

to penetrate into the hidden mysteries of the
K ingdom of God Thi s desi re must not be born
.

o f m e re c u riosi ty n or e v en of a search fo r ab
,

st r act knowledge but rathe r because of th e hope

,

that th rough a t rue understanding of these mys

terie s one can be of benefit not alon e t o himself
, ,

but in some deg ree to the grand body of h u

manity It wi ll be through a kn owledge o f the
.

inn er mysteri e s that we shall be able t o unlock

all of the outer mysteri es and th at we shall
,

unde rstand t he t rue relation of everything in the

outer world Through meditati on we enter i nto
.

a world of cau ses and as we penet rate more

,

d e epl y i nto that world we shall come into th e

1 33
1 34 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

posses sion o f wi s dom an d power that shall brin g

u s la sti n g gai n .

Life as we live i t at pre se n t is filled wi th its

tides with its season s Tides o f en ergy at on e
, .

tim e o f the day flow to the full while later when , ,

th e earth is turn ed away f rom the s un there ,

a re the low tide s when ev e rything and every

,

person seems to need rest an d sleep i n ord e r to ,

replace the energy that ha s b ee n used or with

’

d rawn We have the two seasons sp ring an d

.
,

summe r when everythin g is in a state of acti vi ty

,

an d gro w th ; we have the autumn an d win te r ,

when growth to a large ext ent is suspended .

Th e w orld s high ti de s and low tid e s th e

’
,

world s summer an d winter seasons a re all in

’
,

dicative o f what is taking place in the mind and

body o f man But wh e n mind and body v ib ra t e
.

to etheric vibrations then the tide s sea son s and

, , ,

n ight s will h ave pa ssed f ar away Th e n ew .

order o f things will supersede th e old F o r .

c ountless gene rations man has bee n trav eling

towards this new order Gene ration after gen .

eration n ew degrees of vib ration have bee n es

,

tab lis h ed in th e life of man Th e pri mit i v e man .

kn ew almost nothing of c olor as we see an d

kn ow color to day ; nor o f the h armofiy of s oun d
-

as we h e ar and understan d i t to day be cause ,

color and ha rmony are both degrees of s oul

evoluti on There must be colo r an d harmon y
.
1 36 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

sleep A fterwards when mi n d an d soul vi

.
,

brate consci ously to etheri c vib ration there will

be n o mo re night ; an d thi s im plies tha t sl e ep ,

a s we u nde rs ta nd i t wi ll n o longer be necessa ry

,
.

As one devel ops more fully his rate o f vi

,

brati on i s i ncreased and he is gradua lly becom

ing consci ously relat e d to high e r planes of e x
isten ce .H e gains domini on ov er the physical
b ody with power to take i t up o r lay it down
, ,

and is able to pass i nt o the Fourth Dimension

a t wi ll .H avi ng left t he bo dy behind the so u l
,

fin ds itself clothed with a m ore ethereal fo rm

which i s res ponding t o a rate of vibrati on tha t
has been e stabli shed through the unio n of s oul
and mind .

In the Fourth Dimen sion will be foun d as

many degree s o f life as are represented on this
plan e of existence Th e first d egree is a st rata
.

o f being much nearer to what we ca ll th e earth

than a re the high e r planes an d m uch mor e
closely resembli ng our world than it does the
planes which lie beyond In pas s ing through
.
,

on e is conf ronted by many cond it ions similar to

those he has le ft behind but an un deve loped

,

b eing is e ven more unpleas ant to me et there

than in ou r e arthly exist e nce for the reaso n
,

that wh e n bodies are eth ere alized ev e ry ev i l

,

emotion and de si re that distu rbs the min d is

instantly pi cture d upon the face People li v in g
.
 —
M edi tation Th e Path to P ower 1 37

upon the physical plane are generally able to

hide fro m others what they thi n k an d fe el b ut ,

he r e e ithe r on the lowest or h i ghest plane eye s

, ,

an d featu res immediately respond to th ought

a n d feeling and every excess can be seen u pon
,

t h e fac e s of the beings one m ee ts on this lowe r

p la ne . T h us a person passing t hrough ma y b e

come filled with even a gre ate r ho rror than had

h e been su rrounded b y the same orde r of bein g s

u po n the phy s ical pl ane I have no wish in ex
.
,

plaini ng this to less en th e desi re of anyone t o

,

u nd e rs t an d th e hidden myste ri e s o f life I .

merely wi sh to cau tion him that if his mind is

fille d with fear his passage through this disa
g r ee ab l
e pl a ne may be much r e ta r ded Bu
. t if
he remains hope fully courage ous unde r all ci r
cu mstan ce s , and kn ows that he is absol u t ely
s afe s o long as he re alizes his safe ty that s u ch
, ,

conditions exist only on the l ower plane th en

,

passage through may be like a ray of light in

its s wiftnes s before he pen et r at e s int o a high er
,

plane an d comes in contact with more e n l ight

,

en ed states of consci ousn e ss Rem emb er th e

.
,

li on s are in th e way but th ey are al l chained

, ,

a n d can do no harm un le ss you allow th em to

di sturb you If one does b ecom e entangle d i n

.

th i s l ower plane i t is b ecaus e he has not y et

o verco me an d is still vib rating to th e condition s

f oun d t here I could wish that it w ere u n n eces

.
1 38 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

sary f or me to touch at all upon this ph ase o f

the experien ce but I believe that when one i s
,

going on a j ourn ey into an unkn own count ry he

should know all that is possible of what is lik el y
to confront him Th e one who is lacking in the
.

n ecess a ry de vel opment to consciously ent e r into

the Fou rth Dimension may d ecr ease h is eff orts

to accomplish that en d because of these c o n
dition s which I have point e d out but the c o ur
,

ageou s d eve loped m ind will not hesitate to m a k e

,

the e ff ort Th e pione e rs in al

. lth e d epartme nt s
o f life have been ea rn est fearless people an d
, ,

i t is to the earnest fea rless mind that the dis

,

covery of this new coun t ry come s We are on

.

th e eve of a great s piri tual aw akening Th e

next fe w years will be mo re prolific 1n d is
coveries in this new world th an have al l the
years that have pa ssed .

My d esire is not s o much to tell ab out th e

wond e rs an d glories of this n ew world as it is ,

to dwell u pon the way t ha t leads to it an d the ,

way in which it is to be en te red Meditation .

i s the principal means to this end so I will try

,

to make as definite an d concise as possible the

way to enter into the sta te o f m editati on Let .

me fi rst say that one should not easily grow dis

cou raged if one fails to accomplish medi tation

a s soon as h e would like H e must ke e p on and

.

through such perseveran ce he will succeed in

140 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

en ergy th an f rom o rdin ary sleep O ften wh en

, .
,

approa ching the higher degree s of medi ta t i on ,

people experience a sensati on as though t he body

we re being lifte d upward and floating thro ugh
,

space M any people noticing such sen sati on s

.
, ,

be come fea r ful an d make a quick eff ort to re

,

cove r their mental and physi cal consciou sn es s .

Thi s e ff o rt a ff ects the mind an d the body a n d ,

consciousness return s The sudden eff ort h as

.

caused a dissipation of e ne rgy and both min d ,

and body a re le f t in a depleted condition O n e .

shou l d ha ve perfe ct se lf reliance an d courage

-
.

Th e re should be no fear i n the mi nd concern ing

anything but there should be absolute trust in
,

th e li f e and int e lligen ce that i s w ith i n There .

is nothing t o fe a r excepting fears we create in

ou r own m ental atmosph ere Th e life in each
.

individual is absolutely secur e under an y an d

ev ery condition and with such a feeling e s
,

tab lish ed in the mind n o ha rm can c ome to an y

one I wish t o impre ss this upon the min ds of
.

my re ade rs b e cause e ventually th rough m edi

, ,

tation they will be abl e to consciously li be rat e

the mind and s oul from th e physical organ ism ,

and le av ing it will be able to travel in th e

,

F ourth Dime nsion of space l e avi ng the b o dy,

an d re turn ing to it at will This is no idl e as

.

se rtion b ut an absolute fact I believe that we

, .

shall ev en tually be en abled through thi s con

,
 —
M edi tati on Th e Path to P ower 141

to bri n g about the re al

s ciou s n es s , i zati on an d
exp ress i on of etern al life .

There is a thorough an d n ec es sary mental

pre pa rati on l eading up to the condition we call
medi ta ti on an d without such preparation is ob
,

s e rved one cannot exp ect to enter into a con

,

sci ou s realization o f all that is high e st and best

in m edi ta tion Th e whole emotional nature of
.

man must be subject to mental control Th e .

m in d too must lea rn to control and di rect its

, ,

th o ught i n o rd e r to fo rm a p e rfect adjustm e nt

be tween th at which is subj ective o r inte rio r and
th a t wh i ch i s obj ective or e xt e rior so that a ,

t rue balance may obtain between the inne r and

th e outer life It is just as nec e ssary to prepar e
.

th e way f or medita ti on as i t is fo r the fa rm e r

to prepa re an d fertilize h is ground befor e he
s o w s the seed As on e us e s his mind in a law
.

f u lan d o rd e rly way in the obj e cti ve l ife s o will ,

h e beco me better fitt e d to enter th e subj e cti v e

s i de, an d become attu ned to it I t will b e
.

f o und th a t on e can pass best from a state o f

con cen t rati on in to m edit ation but such con een
,

t ration should have fo r its object th e c ent e ring

o f the mi nd on some thing that would call out a

respon s e fro m within n ot on yo ur toes

, or a ,

bl a ck s pot on the wall as so me advi se ; nor d o

,

I coun s el gazi n g st ea dfastly into a mi r ro r o r a ,

cry stal bal l Al ls u ch pract ic e s tend only to pro

.
1 42 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

duce abn o rmal developmen t an d the mi n d is

not benefited by them O ne might better d wel
. l
upo n somethin g that would perhaps awa ken
within hi m a s ense of beauty o f fo rm o r c ol or .

H e might s i t in fron t o f a beautiful pain t ing ,

analyzing an d drinking in al l o f i ts be autie s ,

o r take a bun ch of rose s or any beau t iful

fl owers an d allow his mind to cen ter firs t u pon
their perfectio n of form and beau ty o f c o lor ,

coming la stly to the ir wonder of perfume .

This would help to d e velop be auty o f though t ;

and finally closing the eyes an d bec omi ng th o r
oughly relaxed in mind an d body one wou ld ,

sti ll con tinue through the i n n er s en se s to feel

and to see what he h ad j u st percei ved in an
outer way This in turn would gradually pa ss
.

away an d with its passing there would awaken

the great supe r consciousn ess o f feelin g tha t
-
,

e cstatic condition o f being which can be felt

that which n o mind can des cribe becaus e i t is
s o much greate r than mi n d or th o ught tha t i t ,

baffles all description .

A f ew fu rther suggesti on s may prove o f

b en efit in attaining to th i s stat e o f meditati on ,

shoul d the mind b e come s lightly wearied by th e

e ff ort of con cent ration Th e person may lie
.

upon a bed or a couch on th e fl at of hi s ba ck

, ,

head on a leve l with the rest of his body or if , ,

elev ated at all only s lightly then in s o far as

, , ,
1 44 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

men tal eff ort By an d by allconsci ousness o f

.

material things will pass away During th e .

first eff o rts t o accomplish meditation one usu ally

fal l s asl ee p a sleep lasting anywhe re from five
,

to tw enty minute s O n awaken i n g one will be

.

gr eatly refreshed But i n real meditation there

.

is a c on diti on which may be t ermed t rance wh e re

there is an e cs tasy o f feeling but wherein there
,

i s no th ought consciousness or at least none tha t

,

wo rds can e xpre ss .

The r e is o ft e n a won der of color and h a r

mony of sound but apparently this i s n ot pe r
,

ceived through a men tal o r sense c onsciousn e ss ,

but rathe r th rough a con s ciou sne s s o f feeli n g .

I was recently t old of a woman who had been

born blind an d wh o could tell di ff erent colors
,

by touching them wi th her fingers This may .

gi ve some i ndicati on of what I mea n when I

say that in this conditi on we feel color an d
sound rather than see o r hear them i n a phys i cal
way .

Ther e i s anoth er s tat e which on ly com e s a ft er

many trials and pe rseveri n g eff o rt where th e ,

mind is as ke e nly awake a s the feelings b ut thi s ,

state does not exist i n the early stag e s o f me dita

tion It com e s only after one i s able to fr ee h i m
.

s elf f rom the physical organ i sm — in oth er wo rd s ,

wh e n he has power t o lay d own or take up his

body at will But in the e arly stages o f m edita
.
 —
M editation Th e Pa th to P ower 1 45

ti on t here is n o complete separation o f soul an d

b o dy It is a conditi on where the mi nd is th or
.

o ughly at rest an d the whole con sci ous nes s i s

,

tha t of feeling I t is impossible to des cribe such

.

an ex pe rience to one wh o ha s never h ad it .

Wh en you can mak e no mental picture o f that

.

wh i ch you wi sh to convey t o anoth er person ,

that person wi ll not un derstand what you are

t rying to explain No matter how much an ex
.

p e rien ce may m ea n to y o u i t can mea

,n litt le to

h im until he h as gone through the sam e ex

pe rien ce .

In coming out o f thi s condition the fir st

ph ysical action o f which on e become s consciou s
is the opening o f the eye s Th e manner o f .

a wakening i s di ff eren t from that i n which one

a wakens from ordi n ary s l eep M ind while in .

,

a ctive is neverthele ss clear

, In order to realize
.

th e benefit de rived one sh ould never think of

,

g e t ti ng up at o n c e b ecause, the force is all a t

th e center o f the o rganism and before gett i ng ,

u p the energy m u s t be sent back to the di ff er

e n t part s o f the bo dy This is done best through

.

th o ught an d breath .

Very slowly begin to breathe in Th e control .

o f the breath mus t be f rom t he di aph ragm .

With the first outgoing b r eath slowly exhaled , ,

ta ke the th ough t tha t the ener gy is going to

h ead an d brai n Feel the st rength of the neck
.
1 46 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

an d head Inh ale another breath As you ex

. .

hale i t s end the en ergy by th ought and fe e ling

,

i nto the left leg an d foot Inhale an other b re ath

.
,

an d d o the same to the righ t foot an d leg t he n ,

to the left a rm an d hand then to the righ t a rm ,

an d h an d Then take three breaths an d as you

.
,

exhale each feel that en ergy is radiati ng from

,

the center to every part of the body j ust a s th e ,

sun ra diates light an d heat

Wh ile little can be adequately told o f th i s in
n er co ndit io n the results fl owing from it ma y
,

be very clea r ly sta ted O n arising from i t on e

.

feels thoroughly renewed an d invigo rated fu ll ,

o f energy an d power both in mind an d b o dy

, .

No ta sk however great s eems beyond o n e s

’
, ,

strength You kn ow that you can do what you

.

will to d o Thu s from fift een minut e s o f medi

.

tation on e can get more refresh ment an d great e r ,

invigoration than from two hou rs o f the m ost

,

rest fu l sleep .

Th e indi vi dual enters in to the state o f m edi

ta tion alone No one can go with h im n o r is
.
,

it po ssible for hi m t o go with anyon e I t is a .

communi on o f the individual soul with the I n

finite S oul o f whi ch it is a part In thi s con
, .

diti on he realiz es the onenes s of alllife an d lo ve .

Th e abili ty t o express that whi ch he h as a c

quired through s u ch realization comes thro ugh
the eff o rt to impart to the man y what he alone
1 48 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

e ventually bring abo ut that which they a re

seeki ng .

If we could always remember that soul an d

mi nd are eve r unfolding to latent powers an d
po ssibilities and that it i s thro ugh s uch unfold
ing that the outer world is continually b ecomin g
new we would see k first this Kingdom of G o d
,

within u s an d then n o matter upon what plane

we were mani festing to i t we would bring th e
,

fullne ss an d completeness o f the condition s

realized withi n and the Kingdom o f God the —
—
Kingd om o f Power would becom e a livi n g
manifestati on u pon earth .

Then shall we ha v e entered i n to th e real

riches of life which embrace a full kn owl e dge
o f the law o f cause and eff ect; Th e true self
mastery i s attained an d we shall have gained
Dominion an d Power over al lthings.
 L I FE I N E! PRE SS I O N

Concent rat i on is the true way in which to ex

p re s s t he p o wer g a ined in medit ati o n Through .

meditat ion is derived a feeling of st rength and

po w e r both mental and physical Al
, lsense of .

weakn e ss is gone Th e body is quickened a n d

.

made new Th e mind forms pi ctures that a re

.

clea r con cise an d vital and paints them with the

,

po wer o f feeling These li ving pictu res in the

.

mind become visi ons to be realized in th e o ute r

wo r ld .E veryt hing seems clear One brings to .

th e m o st difficult task a renewed c onfidence an d

self re liance that tends to make easy anything
-

he un de rtakes This then is the power gained

.
, ,

through meditation an d it is through the in

,

tel lig en t use of t hi s power that the o uter w or ld

is to benefit .

Concentration is nece ssary to the t rue exp res

sion o f the power gaine d in o r der that the r e
may be n o w aste o f energy Th e mind becomes .

centered on what it desi re s to se e exp ressed ;

it may be the work of paint er sculptor com , ,

pos e r o r in vento r Whateve r it is it is only

.
,

through con centration that there wi ll be true

1 49
15 0 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

e xpression an d wo rk will be accomplished wi th

,

out an y strained eff o rt Some of the power that

.

man h as acqui red through meditati on is be i ng

put into his w ork Pygmalion s statue of Gala
.
’

tea bec omes a living breathing thing, It i s n o .

lon ger dead inert matter b ut something whi ch

, ,

ca uses the very life o f man to thrill when look

ing at it This is vital w ork This is life h n d
. .

ing its expression in the world By and by we .

will come to see that everything is alive ; th at

ou r work will li v e on according t o the in tel li
gen ce and energy we have put into it No on e .

need expect to lead a great life in this w o rld

unless he use s this fac ulty o f concentrat i on .

No matt er how m u ch imaginati on a pers on may

have unless he has concentrati on he will not
,

be abl e to express in any full or complete way

what he ha s pictured in his mind True con .

cent rati on means that whate ver one does be ,

i t a little or a great thing he put s not only his ,

mind into the doing o f it but his fe eling a lso , .

Whatever we do whatev er ou r station in h f e

,

may be we sho uld not only put o ur best thought

,

an d feeling int o our work bu t mus t keep the ,

mind c e nte red upon i t E very o riginal thi ng

.

done in this worl d c omes to man firs t as a di s

covery within his o wn life an d that o ri gin al ,

thing becomes an expression in the o uter wo rld

o f hi s inner life Th e man s work then i f it
.
’
, ,
152 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

j cet i s s imply to further his own e nds th e n n o ,

real satisfaction can come ou t of that kind of

con centrati on H is work is n ot creative in any
.

true sense All true creati v e wo rk make s th e

.

w o rld happier and better ; it n e ve r depriv es an y

on e of things necessary to hi s w e ll being Con -
.

centrati on used for the accum ulation of nee dles s

riche s c an never in the end benefit any indi vid
u al Con cen t rat i on tha t tak e s f r om others that
.

whi ch right fully belongs to them can n ever ,

m ake an y h f e richer because o f such po ssessions .

We should unde r stand th at while each and

every indi vi dual h as a pe rfect right t o lo ve him
self an d care for himself an d p rovid e eve ry ,

thing neces sary for his own welfare and com

fo rt y et if he i s doing this at the expense of
,

someone else s welfare he i s not u sing his mind

’

in a t rue o r lawfu l way ; because concentration

will only a vail in the de velopment o f the life of
man as he recogn izes th e n ecessi ty fo r a better
,

world not alone for himself but for eve ryon e

, ,

else and a s he works with that object an d e nd

,

in v i ew S el fi s h n es s in the end works its o wn

.

destruction A thor oughly s elfish man re aps

.

exactly wha t he has sown A man who i s highly .

develope d me ntally and uses h is mind for his

,

own sole good brings greater judgment an d

,

condemnation into hi s life than one wh o h as ,

less knowledge and takes the sam e cours e To .

 Life in E xp res sion 153

wh om much i s gi ven o f hi m much is required

,
.

Wh e n every faculty o f mind is be in g used in a

lawful orderly way with s uch use comes the
, ,

ad v an tage s o f tru e living O n e has a feeling

.

tha t it i s go od to be ali ve and rejoices in the ,

work o f his own hands and mind We all want .

to expres s power We cov et i t perhaps more

.
‘

than an y other possession Th e fa ct that this .

is so should show us that it is a lawful desi re

—
that powe r is intended for our use but that we
cannot ab u se it w ith imp u nity If we do abus e
!
.

it then we must take th e consequ ences that go

,

with s uch abuse for that is the law o f powe r

, .

Al lr ight u s e of po we r whether mental or phys

,

ica l mean s a still greater developm ent of pow er ;

,

but when we use it in a w rong way o r dissi ,

pate it we begin at once to put barriers b e

,

twee n ourselves and the so urc e o f power .

When we desi re po we r solely fo r ou r own

n e ed s and purposes then we begin to limit it
, .

W e can become one with all th e e n e rgy in life ,

through a desire on our part to gi v e o ut to all

,

the world that which has be en gi ven to us Th e .

more we gi ve to the world the more we shall

be filled with uni versal power If we are an x .

ious if we allow ou r minds to be burd en e d wi th

,

th e worry o f resp onsibility our conc e nt ration ,

may take the form o f tens eness strain of mind , ,

and strain o f body This tension i mm e diately

.
1 54 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

cuts off the so urce o f power We are n ot u si ng .

mind or bo dy in the right way but are abusing ,

po wer True concentrati on does not mean st rain

.

or tension It means putting all the energy

.

ne ce s sa ry into the accomplishment of any gi v en

end When the mind b e come s st rained or t e nse
.
,

then an i ncreased flow of bloo d goes to the hea d

in o rder to supply the wast e t issue This blood .

o ften conge sts and thi s congestion results in

,

pain th e mind cannot use i t s inst rum e nt th e

, ,

brain in a no rm al way and the instrument can

, ,

not fu lfill its purpose Rem embe r m e ntal .

strength or physical st rength eithe r for that

,

matte r will not be per fe cted th rough any abuse

,

o f mind o r body Right he re I would like to

.

mak e a few suggesti ons M any people a re d e .

siron s o f using their forc e s in such a way as to

get the best results from them but do not und er ,

stand th e ri ght way in which to bring this abou t .

There are man y little things that we do wh ich ,

could become the m ean s to the desired e nds i f

we w ould on l y learn to do them in t he bes t
way .

At times
we are in a hurry with many
, when ,

things in ou r minds an d are making an eflort ,

to do them allat once we find that instead of ,

d oing them in th e short est and best possible

way we ha ve tak e n more time than was n eces
,

sary and have gotten u nsatisfact ory results

, .
1 56 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

tion o f min d from his work O ften when peo

.

ple are supposed to be doin g nothing they are

using up as much energy as if they were en
gaged in a ctive work of the most exacting kin d .

You may notice the hands clen ched or th e mu s

,

cles t ense o r you may n oti ce that they make

,

useles s m oti ons wi th thei r heads hands or feet

, .

Al lth is i s a waste o f energy ; n othing i s be ing

accomplished by i t Such pe ople wi ll tell you
.

that they d o thi s beca u s e they are nervous .

Thei r nervous n ess will c ontinue j us t s o lo ng a s

they expend energy us elessly Wh en on e h as
.

nothing t o do an d s its down t o rest let hi m

, ,

l ea rn to re st in a way that will prov e beneficial ;

let hi m relax both mind an d body ; this will
b ring him re s t .

Th rough doing litt le th i ngs in a ri gh t way it ,

becomes possibl e fo r u s to do greater things .

It is much e asie r to do things in a right way

—
than to do them in a w rong way tha t is the ,

use of natu ral m ethods is much le ss of a t ax

upon the mind and body than strained and un
natu ral etf ort Take as an illust ration th e ri gid
.

t ension of th e c lergyman or l ec tu rer when ad

d ressing his audience O ften he puts into h is
.

one s ermon o r l ectu re enough energy to have

d eli vere d fou r o r five Wh en finished his mind
.

and body are both exha usted an d h is sermon

,
 L ife in E xp res s ion 15 7

or lecture h as been un attract i ve to his audience ,

be c au se he h a s c on veyed to his he arers s ome

thing of hi s own mental and physical tensi on .

Th e speaker who gi ves his h e arers a sense o f

reserv e power a feeling that he can use three
, ,

or four or five t imes as much force if it is

,

necessa ry to do so i s the one who is the most

,

restful to hear and who impre sses his audiences

in th e most emphatic way No lectu rer o r .

clergyman should be exhausted wh en he has

fin ish e d h i s address H e is vitally depleted b e
.

ca use he has n ot been using his forces in the

right way Wh at holds t rue o f Sp eakers holds
.

t rue in regard to allother p e opl e in life Abuse .

of energy leads to ment al and physical w eak

ne s s an d the ri ght u s e of energy always t e nds
,

toward health and strength .

Re m emb e r that conc en t ration does not mean

strai n Wh en th e mind is thoroughly acti ve it
.

doe s not mean that ther e should be w rinkle s in

the fo rehead or physica l contraction in any
,

oth er part of the body It i s possible t o do a

.

great deal o f right thinking without the h e ad

bec omin g heated or t he bloo d conge sted But .

inten s e wrong thinki ng will c reate h eat in th e

hea d an d this excessi v e heat may d e st r oy th e
,

root s of the hair and a bald head be the re sult

, .

We wan t th e full devel opment o f the imaging

1 58 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

faculty but w e d o n ot want the heat ed i magi

,

n a tion
. Le arn to control your th ough ts Think .

wi th clea rn e ss and think wi th directness Kee p .

the mind cente red bu t not in a stra ined or a

,

tense way Many people do not understand that

.

they can put power and st rength int o their

w ork without putti n g strain They have the .

idea that the strain is as essential as the pow e r .

Yo u will s ee one man do a thing with ea se so ,

that i t is a pleasure to watch him ; while an

othe r man equal , ly st rong strains vi ol en tly in
,

o rder to do the same thing Putting rightful . ly

directed thought into the wo rk always make s
it easie r o f accomplishment In o rder to do .

anyth ing easily and do i t well one will find tha t ,

h e m u st tak e int erest in it When one is in .

lov e with his work the hou rs pas s quickly and ,

n eith er mind nor body is tired or weari e d But .

if th e w ork is distaste ful o r if the mind i s wan

,

dering f rom the work to o ther things then th e ,

ho u rs will d rag on and the w ork n ot be a tru e

,

expression of the person s thought and eflort

’
.

If one fe els capable o f better things then by ,

doing the work in which he is then engage d i n

th e b e st possible way he will the s ooner grad
,

uate from it and get the opport u nity for doing

,

th e mo re congenia l work E ve ry real success

.

in life is made b e cause of pe r severing con een

trated e ff o rt and we can best per s evere an d
,
160 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

l i fe It will take on a n ew an d a deepe r m ean

.

ing People mu st lea rn to value things at their

.

rea l wo rth .

Conce ntrat i on is a mean s o f expre ssi n g

powe r ; bu t it is n ot power M editation is a
.

mean s o f acqui ring power ; but it also i s n ot

power . I f one should employ conc ent ration
without regard to meditation afte r a whil e he ,

would find that h e had be come devitalize d an d ,

that h e was n o longer able to gi v e full and com

p lete expression to his work I n the
. same way
if on e d evotes too much time to me ditation an d ,

none to conc e ntration afte r a time th e pow e r

,

he has b een acqui ring through meditation will

have fo rsaken him H e will become d eplete d
.

and d evitaliz e d just as much as the man wh o

has gi v en little thought to concent ration So .

we find that i t is on ly th e w e ll poised man wh o-

rec eive s powe r th rough m editation and uses it

thro ugh concent ration who live s a s t rong true
, ,

life Th ere can be no mistak e about this an d

.
,

one can easi ly pro ve th e trut h of i t for hims e lf .

We should all be po ssessed of powe r whil e in ,

re pose and whi l e in action have a se n se o f re

,

se rv e pow er Thus we will n ot on ly be able to

.

accomplish that which at the momen t we may

b e doing but we shall have a great storeho use of
,

en ergy to d raw from .

Through the wisely di rected use o f mi n d an d

 Life in E xpres sion 161

body ea ch day s work should leave us stron ger

’

an d better prep ared f or the wo rk o f the mo r

row Th e developmen t of power should be

.

som ethi ng t ha t is con t in ua ll ro wi i t he

y g n g n

life I f pe ople hold t o the idea that as they

.

grow older i t is n atural that they should l os e

power th e n they will re ap the expre ssion of th at
,

kind o f thi nki ng But if th ey thi nk th at greater

.

inte lligence i s going to put th em in po ssession

of gre ater power th en with each succ e eding
,

y ear t hey will b e come more an d mo re powe r ful .

It i s what we write in to the sub con scious -

mind that we shall express later on I f we wri te .

wisdom an d st rength th e n we s h all exp res s

,

wisd om and st ren gt h We shall reap what w e

.

hav e s own Keep th e mind young by ren ewing

.

it through meditation Keep the body stron g .

—
by right u se In oth e r wo rds make you r life
.

wh at you wan t it t o be n ot what the mind of ,

the w orld has thought it was going to be w i th ,

all i ts weakn ess es an d in firmities but what you ,

yourself have hoped an d dre ame d an d wanted

—
it t o b e an expressi on of you r best thought an d
fee l i n g Feel that you a re the archite ct an d the
.
,

builder o f yo ur own house ; that i f i t is weak at

an y poin t y o u have th e power an d the stren gth
,

to re plan an d re c reate it Do n ot leave to

-
.

othe rs what you should do for yourself ; do your

own thin ki ng ; make your own plan s ; expres s
1 62 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

th rough your own eff o rts ; l ive the self con -

ta in ed the fully c ontro lled life

, Feel that y o u
.

a re th e ma ster an d that things are your s e rv

,

ants an d that th e servants must re spond to th e

,

will o f the ma ste r Lea rn to cont rol ev e ry

.

thing ; an d be n ot c on troll e d by an ything s a v e ,

by the laws which ten d to re gulate your o wn

life Thus you wi ll grow in wi sdom an d in
.

powe r an d wi ll be ha sten in g the ti me wh en

, ,

consciously life shall be et ern al beca u s e all

, ,

such procedure will give a s en se o f perman en cy

to h fe .

Remember th at l i fe n ever di e s ; is n ever s i ck ;

is never dis eased Th at l i fe is n ever s ubj ect t o
.

sin That i t is only when th e mind become s

.

distorted through vain i magin ati on s th at th e r e

i s any sen se o f sin Th at s in is only man s fa ls e
.
’

—
way of looking at life a di sease of the mi n d ,

which lat er becomes a disea se of body Tha t .

at best these conditi ons a re only transito r y .

That power ha s been gi v en unto man to over

com e e ven his own wrong thin king That when .

h e see s an d kn ow s who he is h is obj e ct an d

,

pu rpose in life then he is n o lon ger subj ect to

,

an y law of sin and dea th and respon ds on ly

,

t o the eternal laws of the Spi ri t o f Li fe .

H e b e com e s a tru e expre s si on of the divin e i d e a

— the conscio u s spi ritu al being havi ng d omin i o n
and pow e r over all things .
1 64 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

l arge way we have summed up what we deem

n ecessary fo r pe r fec t health and n ow in a more
,

detaile d way l et u s s tep by s tep take up on e

, ,

thing after anothe r nece ssa ry to a full realiza

tion o f health and wholeness It i s useles s to .

strain a fter physical health through confo rmity

to outward regulations alone Wholesom e food .

pl enty of fr esh ai r restful sl eep —e ach h as i ts

,

place in the pl an of li fe but they all co me as

,

the n atu ral sequenc e o f right thinkin g an d are

more truly an expression o f unconsci ou s thought
a c ti on tha n i s ge n erally suppos ed because the ,

i nn er life i s continually p r es sing upon th e outer

fo r exp re ssion an d all tru e thought and feelin g
,

a re caus e s fo r t ru e out e r e ff e cts Th e tem .

perat e mind begets physical temperan ce Th e .

— —
c lean mind bo di l y cl e an l in es s th e con trolled
thought results in the cont rolled acti on .

Al loute r states exist and are d e penden t up on

inner thought and fee ling O ur bo dies are what
.

they are because of what we have felt an d

,

thought I f th en they do n ot express al

. lth a t
we should like to hav e them expre s s the same ,

intel ligenc e and pow er that fo rm ed them can

be u sed to re form them But with this like
-
.

e ve rythi ng else we d o there i s a lawful an d

,

o rderly way and on ly as thi s is followed can we

expect that the new form i s going to be an y
more p er fect or perman ent than the old Th e .
 M en tal an d Ph ys ical Wh ol
en ess 1 65

mistak e s in the past have come from the fact

that we were un c on scious that we and we al one
, ,

we re buildin g the habi tati on s in whi ch w e live .

We h ad n o kn owle dge that the body was taking

form because of what we thought an d fe lt ; that
the mind s thought of w e akness was going to
’

leav e its m ark upon t he body ; that the though t

o f p o verty wa s go ing to impoverish t h e blood ;

th at men ta l pa in was going to become physica l

pa i n ; that the inflamed mind was the cause of
b odily inflammation We did no t kn ow that all
.

o u r thought pictu re s of sin

-
dise ase and de ath
,

we r e lat e r on goin g t o p roduce pain disease ,

an d disintegration of body Reaching a pl ac e

.

wh ere the light o f t ruth illu min e s th e mind w e ,

a re becoming consciou s that th e old o r der o f

things must be supe rs eded by a n e w ord e r that ,

th e cause for physical dis eas e and d eath does

n ot e xi st in the e xternal wh ere we ha v e b e en
—
won t to look fo r it that man is not subj e ct t o
mate rial things but h as powe r within himsel f
,

to creat e o r re creat e his own body

-
I f expre s
.

sion is pattern ed afte r the un s een ideal th en w e

,

n e ed not ex pe ct a whole exp ression if the ideal

is only partial or i ncomplet e Wh e n I write of

.

men tal wholeness I m ean that c ondi tion o f

,

thought or min d whe re in one is able to discern

th e right relationship the rel ati ve value of e ach
,

condition o r thing that p re s ent s itsel f to t h e

1 66 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

min d . It i s that clearn ess of vision whi ch per

ceives ev e rythi n g a s being good wh en it is in
,

ri ght relati on to everything el s e Th a t in h ar.

mon y is si mply misplacemen t o r s omething m ade

to do duty fo r which i t wa s n ev e r in tended ;
that harmony mean s that there is a place fo r
eve rythi n g an d that eve ryth ing should be in i ts
—
place Negat ive thoughts are partial posi ti ve
.

thoughts have to d o with wholene ss Nega tive .

th oughts have t o do with the devi l an d outer

—
darkn es s positive thought s have to do wit h the
Kingdom of G od an d the light th at is within u s .

—
Negative th oughts produce disi n te gration posi
tive thought is c re ativ e Negati ve thoughts have
.

—
to do with de ath po sitive thoughts with the
life etern al We must the refore learn t o thin k
.
, ,

in a posi tive way In this way we a re layi ng

.

the foun dati on on which to build our house

n a h —
which is to e eter l in t e hea ve ns a house
b
that i s n ot built with han ds but th e unseen sub
,

stance ou t of which it is to be builded is faith ,

and the law by which it is gove rn e d—th e s u

p rem e law of love an d the a rchitect— the whole
—
mi n d .

a im, th e s ou lcan n ot con test

Ea rth h as n o cl .

h
Kn ow t y s elf part of th e etern alS ou rce
h
An d n aug t can s tan d be f o re th y s p i rit s f orce
’
.
!

Positi ve thought i s forceful . l

Al c r ea tive
1 68 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

it were forming a n ote in the gran d sym phon ic

,

harmony of life When th e eye is sin gle the

.
,

whole body is filled with light Wh e n the mind .

i s c entere d on one desire it wishes to see ex

pre ssed then the wo rk has re ally begu n to take
,

form the foundatio n is being laid each thought

, ,

th at i s po sitive an d whole becom e s m eta pho ric ,

ally spe aking a ston e or a b rick in t h e n e w

,

structure but to exp re ss pe r fect physical hea l th

,

and st ren gth the mi n d mu st gi ve its un divide d

,

atten tion t o forming its tho ughts in such a way

that only that which is e nduring is going to enter
into bodily construction Let us t ake this i nto
.

consid e ration that every thought w e t hink in

,

mind s oo n e r or l ater finds physical exp ression

the whole thoughts an d the partial th ou ghts ,

th e go od t houghts and th e ev il thought s The re .

fore if the structure is really going to repre

,

s ent health an d st ren gth th e ev il or p artial ,

thoughts must be e liminate d and this can only ,

b e done th rough th e int roduct ion of strong ,

whol e thoughts ; kee pin g the mind single to men

ta l h ealth and wholene s s Th e chief offi c e of
.

th e body i s to respond to th e desire s an d wish e s

o f the m in d Th e habi tual state of mind b e
.

comes the habitual sta te of body ; f or b ody is

just what soul an d mind make it Th e body .

originat e s nothing but i s quic k to respond t o

,

what the mind thinks Combin e d thought and

.
 M en tal an d Ph ys ical Wh ol
en ess 1 69

f eelin g is the mast er an d the bo dy i s the s erv

an t. But th e body ca n n o more serve two ma s
t e rs in the right way than a ma n can serv e tw o
masters M an s m ind is rent between the de
.
’

s ires an d the wi she s of the two maste rs so that

he i s n ot able to s erve one or t he oth e r in a per
feet way— thu s th e b ody of man becom e s dis
ea se d and discordant when man a t o ne time is

thi n ki ng h i s e vil or pa rtial thought s and at an

o the r his good or whol e t houghts When th ere
.

i s bu t one course of mental action recogn ized ,

the n th e body will become tho roughl y attuned

or a t on e with the mind and each true m ental
-
,

de si r e will find its pe r fe ct exp re ssion in th e body

o f man : this con stitute s the only royal road
to health H ea lth is as free to us as th e ai r w e
.

bre ath e but w e kn ow that only as we e xhal e th e

,

atmo sphere that is in the body do we inhal e the

pu r e air from without an d e xactly in the same
,

pro portion a s we exhale we inhal e In the same .

way o nly a s th e mind b e come s animated with

,

strong t rue desires and th e eff ort to li ve thos e

,

desire s is there a full retu r n or respons e t o th e

,

desire W e can h av e in thi s life what we will

.

to h ave when we picture in mind that wh i ch

we d e si re an d i f we keep f rom introducing
,

thoughts in to the mind which in any way con

tra dict ou r des i re s we m ay rest absolu t ely as
,

sured o f their c onsummat ion M en tal p oise

.
170 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

—
mean s adj u s tmen t a dj ustment mean s a b a r
—
mon ious thinking harmony of th ought is at
tu n emen t to life I t is the wo rk of ea ch
.

individual t o s o attun e his own mind that i t w ill

be in harmony with the inne r spiri t and e xte rn al
environ ment This is at on e m ent betwe en G o d
.
- -

an d man — between cause an d e ff ect an d s uch

—
at o ne m ent re sults in m ental holiness and bodily
- -

wholeness .E ve ryt hing don e in l ife to bri n g

abou t this end is just s o much gain e d .

Th e po ised mind is always the controll ed te m

pe rate mind Th e well considere d thought is
.
-

always followed by the right action Mind an d .

body grow s t rong through use Th e difleren t .

faculti e s of th e min d have thei r di re ct action

upon the di ff erent o rgans of the body the re fo re ,

eve ry faculty should b e culti v ate d Th e li f e .

should n ot ha ve e xc e ss in on e di re ction and lack

in some oth er Natu re is not trying to make a
.

genius of man but perfect m en an d wome n wh o

,

a re able to meet an y or eve ry condition in life

that may pre s e nt itself and grow strong th rough
such m e eting Following this cours e th e re
.

com e s the sen s e of mental pow e r the powe r t o ,

ove rcome This power in turn is transmi tt ed

.

into physical pow e r and little by litt le th e on e

who f orm erly thought of h i ms elf as being m en
t a l ly or physically weak becomes men tally
,

and physically st rong f or we can b ecome wha t

,
172 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

body will begin to res pon d to the n ew action s et

up in the mind This h old s goo d n ot on ly of
.
,

the body but as regard s everything else we do

,

in life If we have formed habits in the past

.

that ha v e kept o r hind e re d u s from exp r es s ing

the highest an d best within us then it is possible
,

for us to dest roy the fo rce of these old h a bits

—
by establishing n ew one s in othe r words re ,

placing the ol d by th e n ew . Working with

Universal Will we be com e what we will t o b e
come I cann ot emphasize too s trongly th e
.

necessity for po siti v e thinki n g . Al l positive

thought is f ormative and creative Alln ega ti ve .

thought is destr ucti v e an d disin tegrating .

Creati v e po s iti ve thought is an efi ort on the

pa rt of man to work with God t o work as G o d
,

doe s to bring o rd er ou t of chaos to b ri n g light

, ,

ou t of darkn e ss to gi ve exp re ssi on to that which

,

is not y e t se en ; to make that which is in com

p le te o r p a rt ial whole and compl e te T h e e n .

lighten e d man wo rks as Go d works I reite r at e .

—
that negati v e thought is of it s father th e devil
—that d evil o f s elf which arrays itself in o
p
position to the goo d that devil which has to
,
!

d e al with only that which i s partial that b e ,

lieves in th e da rkn ess an d lives i n th e outer da rk

n e ss belie v i n g that i t is sepa ra t e from both G od

an d man ; se rvi ng its own selfi s h end s an d p ur

poses The man o r the woman wh o beli eves in

.
 M en tal an d Phys ical Wh ol
en ess 173

or a ccepts this n egati ve way of selfishne ss dis ,

eas e and death is s imply s owi n g to the win d

an d will rea p in the whirl wi n d Whatsoever
a man soweth that also shall he reap Negati ve .
!

thought expre ss es i tself through a va riety of

—
wa ys an d mean s worry an xi ety poverty , , ,

mah ce anger hate jeal ousy p ri de un kindn ess

, , , , , ,

impatience doubt fear are all the fruit s o f

, , ,

n e ga ti ve thi n ki ng They are all den i als o f Go d s

’
.

e t e rnal love an d me rcy o f God s etern al good ,

’

n e ss an d p ower God s eternal tru th an d ju s

’
,

tice They all go to fo rm an atm osphere of

.

da rkn e ss ab out the pers on wh o bel i eves in or

accept s them as a way of h f e They al ltend .

to s e pa rate God f rom man and man f rom his

fe llowman They en d in pain
. di seas e an d ,

d e ath . They h ave n o p ower over an y in dividua l

s ave as th at in dividual b el
ieves in the m an d

g i ves th em p ower momen t they can be

. At an y

made to take fli ght and van i sh away th rough

th e in t rodu ction o f e n li gh t en e d positi ve creat ive ,

th ought .

Light h as power at al l time s to overcome

da rkn e s s Good h as power at al
. ltim e s to ove r
c ome e v il H ealth whol en ess h as power at all
.
,

tim es to over com e pai n o r di s eas e Let the sun .

shin e an d the darkn ess is di spelled Ack n owl .

edge th e good an d the evi l i s gon e Believe in .

he al th as yo ur n at u ral bi rth ri ght an d th e

174 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

shadows o f pain an d di s ea s e pa ss away He .

that overcometh shall in herit all things an d I

shall be his God an d he shall be my s on Un i .

versal Omniscience an d will is worki ng in an d

th rough the life o f the in dividual wh o s et s him
self to th e wo rk of ov ercoming all negative con
dition s thro ugh po sitive soul and mind ac tion .

Life is wha t we ma ke i t . We can be wha t we

des ire an d wil
l to b e . Li m it ati ons a re on ly to
be recogn iz e d i n order t o be overc ome An y .

lack we may perceive in ourselves should on ly

be an incenti ve to s to overcome the la ck t o
u —
subst itute s tr ength for weakn ess E very desi re.

and ev e ry efi ort is filled wi th the s eed o f th is

grea ter de sire an d e ff ort an d that whi ch i s per
,

ce ive d as only a spa rk at on e ti me become s a

li ving flame to enlighten the pathway o f life .

E ve ry thing n e cessa ry t o the perfect li fe lives

in us whethe r it b e int elligence o r en ergy I t
, .

is the pot ential intel ligence in us that on c e ,

awakened becomes th e facto r to con sci ou sly re

,

l ate us to Uni versal Intelligence It is the .

powe r latent in the indi vidual life when rea li z e d

that reach e s out and makes us on e with al l
pow er De si re and Will b ring to u s everythi n g
.

n e c e ssa ry not only t o th e accomplishm en t o f an y

,

gi ven end o r pu rpose but every n e ces sary ma

,

teria lthing in th e oute r life First De si re to

.
,

use every faculty of min d then wi ll t o do it

,
176 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

use his m ind in a way to exerci s e his every

faculty ; al lh i s th ought pictures shall b e clear
-
,

concise an d whole H e wi ll us e con ce n t rat ion

.

o f m i nd in al lhi s work He will u s e perse

.

veran ce in all h is eflorts .H e wi ll b e pa tien t

i n waiting for oute r expression o f his inn er
i deal s H e will p ractice gen tlen ess an d ki nd
.

n e ss in h is dealings wi th other people I n fact he .

wil l u s e every att ribute o f soul and every faculty

of min d in h is e fi ort to expres s al lth at is with i n
him H ereto fore we have thought o f th is way
.

o f l ife a s on e di ffi c u lt o f attainmen t tha t i n t he

,

ent ering o f it we w ould s acrifice much ; t hat we

,

would have to give up much that we had held

dea r in the past ; that it w ould neces sa rily b e
th e mean s o f shutting u s out o f the lives of man y
whom we had loved ; that i t w ould i nterfere
with our wo rldly accomplishmen t s ; that i t would
destroy our wo rldly pleasures an d tha t li fe
would be shorn of count less mean s an d thing s
that we had held to as be in g n eces sa ry i n th e
p re s ent life and the compen sati on we were to
,

receive looked all so vague an d far away that

we have be en det erre d from en t erin g int o th e
s trait and narrow way . We had n o a de quate
conception of its joys o f its h ope s an d an ti ci
,

p a tio n s ; h o w ea ch hea r t fel t de si re w a s to be

realized in act ; what a beauti ful an d wh at a
won derful way it was goin g to p rove ; that
 M en tal a n d Phys ical Wh ol
en ess 177

through what we have gi ven up or what we had

a ppare n tly sacrificed we were goi n g to be re
,

warded a hundred fold Th at we were going

.

to be to u ch e d by the heart s o f pe ople and ou r

hearts touch them i n turn in a way that we had ,

n e ver be en able t o d o while traveling the br oa d

w ay of lif e We were n ot prepared to believe

.

in a n ew c onsci ousne ss o f life that l ik e the ris ,

in g sun wou ld add n ew lust er an d glory to

e v erything in l i f e Y et all this i s t rue Th e
. .

n ew way the strai t an d th e n arrow way c on

, ,

—
ta ins a thousand fold yes ten thousan d fold ,

more o f the wonder th e beauty and the glory

,

o f life than ev e r we have been able to fin d in the

ol d way o f li ving De s ire and Will m ake it pos

.

s ibl e for us all to ent er thi s n ew way th e way ,

o f h oliness of happin ess o f wholen e s s

, H ealth
, .

a n d s tren gth of mi n d h ealth an d strength of

,

b o dy are th e rew ard s o f c onformity to Universal

,

L aw an d order Th e mi n d s adjustm ent to

’
.
,

in n e r c on dition s an d external environmen t

b ri n gs th e realization o f the Kingdom of G od ,

th e K ingd om o f Love an d Wisdom in m an s

’

i n t eri o r life and this realizati on lead s in tu rn

,

to the inn er kingdom taking fo rm i n the outer

,

wo rld because o f the desire that Th y Ki n gdom

,

s h all come on ea rth as it is in Heaven .

 THE CRE ATI O N O F A W ORLD
M an is a living soul and i n the efi ort o f the
,

soul for expres si on min d an d body are evolve d

,
.

If thought i s a produ ct o f m in d an d mind an ,

outgr owth o f soul or feeling then thought must

,

be something les s than feeling When we say .

thoughts a re thi n gs we are sayin g s o me

!
,

thing which i s n ot absolutely true be caus e the ,

real substance o f things lies back o f all thin k

ing Th e re al subst ance come s from th e gr eat
.

unseen w orld o f the forml e ss Forms are onl y .

th e out er expre ss ion of the unse en subst anc e .

We a re coming to kn ow t hat the feeling o r the ,

inn er i mpulse o f b eing h as far more to do with

,

making our li ves what they are than h as o ur ,

thinkin g .

Th er e are man y degree s of feel ing bu t every ,

d egree has its impuls e from the invi s ibl e w orld

of ca u se an d is a manifestati on o f the fe el ing
,

of l ove We may call it faith we may call i t

.
‘

hope we may call it joy but after al

, , li t is an
exp re ssion o f h —
t e one supreme feeling Lo ve .

We a r e told that God i s all there is t hat H e ,

is a l l in al l through all and ab ove all th a t H e

, ,

178
18 0 A New H eaven an d a New E a rth .

of God manifest ing i ts elf in man s inmost l i fe ’

.

From th e uninte rrupt ed fl ow o f the Spi r it there ,

come s the renewed mind ; and from spiri t an d

mi n d in harmony the re come s the p er fect s erv
i ce the givi n g of one s self to benefit to h elp
,
’
, ,

to uplift one s fell ow man Love is the i nn e r

’
-
.

cause and s e rvic e i s the oute r expression If .

th ere is not the will ing kindly servi c e then th e

, ,

dominati ng factor in life must b e som ething

oth e r tha n th e Spirit of Love Pu r e religion .
,

the re fo re is n e ce ssary becau se th rough it we

,

come cl ose to the Great H e art of Life which i s ,

Lo ve an d are fa r b e tt e r able beca u se of it t o

,

render t rue service t o our fellow man which -

, ,

afte r al l i s the be s t worship of God

, I t is .

th rough an u nd erstanding and re lation to th e

part s that w e a re enabl e d finally to kn ow our
,

complet e relation to the whole .

h
H e pray et be st, wh o l oveth bes t

Al h h
lt in g s bo t g reat an d s mal l;
F or th e d ea r God wh o l oveth us,

H e ma d e an d l oveth all!
.

osophy s eeks to define o r explain the l aw s

Phil
o f life It deals with something of the inne r
. ,

an d p ract ical ly all of the out e r lif e of man I ts .

systems a re a l l wo rked out through a purely

m ental p roce ss It thinks or reasons and f o rm s
.

judgment s conc e rn ing both the i n ner an d th e

 Th e Creation o f a World 18 1

outer life If a philosophy were fundam en tally

.

true i t might reasonably be expected to pro

,

ceed l ogically to i ts ultimate real co n cept i on of

li fe b ut i f each philo s ophy starts with a basi s

,

o f its own n o m atte r how reaso n able o r l ogi cal

,

i t may be t h e ultim at e conclusion c ann ot b e

,

more real than its beginning While ph il os o .

p hie s have been a ccepted to a great e r deg r ee by

th e inte lle ct ua l ly develop e d than has religion , ,

t h e re i s n ev erth ele s s a unity t o be foun d in re

, ,

l igion that is n ot t o be found in philosophies

w ith their many di ff ering bases Th e Spi rit o f .

L ove an d Se rvice is fou n d to be the same among

al lpe ople In fact we m ay s ay that t he funda
.

mental basis all true religion is the Spirit

of ,

o f Lo ve an d all difl eren t iation s proceeding from

'

that Spirit such as Faith H ope Joy and Peace

, , , .

B ut though philos ophies may have b ee n fo u nded

u pon basic untruth there is no reason why a
,

p hilosophy should no t be f o rmulated which

would accept God a s O mn ipo te nt Omniscient ,

a n d Omnipr e sent Such a philosophy can be

.

wo rked out which fr om first to last wi ll b e in

,

k eepi n g wit h its fundam en tal p rincipl e s Ph i .

los oph y then shall become so uni ted to re l igion

that it will be able t o give expression to the e x

p e rie n ces o f lif e d e ri ved f rom the abso l ute t r uth

that c om es th ro ugh re ligio n .

A fter philosophy comes s cience Appl i e d .

182 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

S ci ence actual demonst ration of the work

15 an

ing out o f law but there are many premises in

,

s cie n ce for wh i ch t here are as yet n o ab s olute

demon st rati on s If the basi s o f al

. l scient ific
thought were founded in the law o f th e unity of
life the de monstration or eflects p roceeding
,

f rom scien ce would be the actual outer man if es

f ati ou o f the t ruth Th e scien tific text bo oks
.
-

o f even twenty five yea r s ag o are o f li ttle use

-

at the present time an d those o f fifty yea rs,

back a re practically obsolete If all the s cien .

tific theories h e ld to by the books of the pres

en t as being c o r rect o r true
,
but that a s ye t ,

have not b e en demonstrated were to be elimi ,

n ated an d only tho se wh i ch have be en dem o n

,

s tra ted were le ft ou r sci e ntific lib r ari e s w ou ld

,

be dimi n ished at l e ast b y on e hal f To the one -

.

outside th e onlooke r i t would s eem as th o ugh

, ,

science we re the only thing that could be de

pende d upon bu t th e science of to day is almos t
,

as narrow as the the ol ogy of th e p resent I t .

has its infall ibl e cree ds and dogmas an d for th e

scientific man to go outside of these creeds a n d
dogmas is likely to be th e means of his being
ost racized by his fell ow sci entists But thi s .

fo rms no valid re ason fo r belittling the wonder

.

ful wo rk that is b eing don e by the scien ce o f

to day It only goe s to show that man s u r
-
.

rounds hims elf by limitations and through them ,

1 84 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

into a stat e o f peace an d rest so that all im ,

pulse or outfl ow from the cen ter of life may

g ive n ew e n ergy to m ind and b o dy T h e mind .
,

havi n g becom e ren ewed by th e soul s en ergy ’

,

con sciously begi n s to c reate n ew vita lized ,

th ought pictu res -

Thes e inn er crea tion s are
.

later actualized in forms of power on earth At .

p resent man d oes n ot un derstan d to h ow great

a deg ree hi s own life a fi ects the wo rld in whi ch
he lives H e is n ot con scious that the chan ge s
.

taki ng place in i t are th e results o f his own

force m aki ng itself felt through th ought an d
,

action Throu g h his own evol

. u ti on th e crea ti on

of a worl d is takin g p l
a ce Allthe w onder an d
.

ton e of color all the harmony an d be auty of

,

sound w e re fi rst hi s own inner rev elat i on an d ,

later they became rev e aled in n atu re Nature .

is man s mi rror in which he s ees all tha t he

’
,

has eve! felt thought or done Th e subj e cti v e

, , .

mind is man s inn er book of life and natu re i s

’
,

man s oute r book of sym bols As is the i n n er

’
.
,

so i s the outer M an is e ver unfoldi ng to th e

.

pl an written into his life an d so must alln a ,

tu re grow and expand in order to perfectly sym

b ol iz e that plan .

In southern California there lives a man by

the name of Luther Bu rbank who is startli n g ,

the wo rld by his method s and re sults H e n ot .

only multiplies va ri eties of fruits an d flowers ,

 Th e Creation o f a World 185

b ut ctually p roduce s enti rel y n ew varieti es

a ,

s uch as the world h as n e ver seen or kn o wn b e

f ore . M r Burban k i s conscious in every case

.

o f what he i s t rying to do With him the re is

.

n o haphazard luck or chance H e is conscious ly

.

d ealin g wi th eternal laws and kn ows in ad v anc e

,

what he wishes to accomplish B e ca u se o f such .

k n owin g he has b ee n able to accomplish in a

g rea t er degr e e m o r e tha n any oth er m a n has e v e r
s ucceeded in doing in the past This does not .

mean that in years to come a great er Bu rbank

s h a ll n ot arise who shall do still mo re wonde r
,

ful thin gs for th e w orld But a gratefu l wo rl d

.

will alway s hold in te n der love and rem e m

b ra nc e the man who is doing so m u ch to mak e
it not only a mo re b e autif u l p l ace in which t o
l ive but also a more bountiful and better wo rl d ;
, ,

on e which will yield be t ter f ruits and a gr e ater

a bun dan ce there of beca u s e h e has li v ed .

Al lmen wh o feel who thi n k and act a re Bu r

, ,

banks but all men a re not wo rking conscious l y

,

as he is fo r a given en d They a re wo r king on

.
,

al lu n conscious of what th ey a r e do ing u n con ,

s cious that they a re adding to th e worl d s pos ’

sessi ons An d because of this that which might

.
,

be f ully exp r essed in th e ir day and gen eration

is c ontinued into a futu r e tim e If lik e Bu r .
,

bank we all kn ew what we wante d to do and

, ,

how we wan ted t o do i t and in ou r k nowing ,

1 86 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

an d d oin g we were co ope rati ng with eter -

n allaw s th en on e day in s uch a life o f a e c o m

,

p lis h me n t migh t bring gre at er re s ul ts t h an a

thou sand yea rs o f groping eff ort in the pa st .

Th e M aste r said Store up riches in heaven

,

—m e ani n g by this that every true an d beauti fu l

th ought pic tu r e w orked ou t in a consci o u s way
-

would late r on become the real capit al in life ,

perman ent ri ches upon whi ch we might d r aw a t

n eed . To i llu strate : one may go to some bea u
tiful place meet delightful p e opl e and have a
,

happy joyous time which leaves its imp ress

, ,

upon the mind o nly howev er to be appare n tly

, , ,

forgott en as on e become s absorbed in o ther

things Then possibly a lette r comes from th e
.
, ,

friend visite d o r som e oth er incid ent may occur

to cau se the mind t o r eve rt back to the pl e a s an t
experience O ne beco mes brightened an d happy
.

because of his memories ; th e joyous time live s

on in the life and may be r ecalled at will by th e
,

conscious mind This is what can be done with

.

re ference to eve rything else in life Life is a .

building process and w e a re addin g something

,

to it all th e time which will li ve on and be come

,

an a s s e t or l iability just a s we choos e to ha v e it

, .

When the vital impulse is behind th e tho ught

pictu re wh e n w e fe el what we a re thinking then
, ,

that pictu r e becom e s a living thing In t his .

way we may learn t o p rolong our live s ; in th is

1 88 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

o f the good an d evil in life Th e Tree o f Knowl

.

edge is the Tree o f Goo d an d E vi l Th e good .

is the reality an d the evil is th e n ega tiv e quality

, ,

the somethi n g that con t radict s rea lity b ut ,

through which we understand what the reality is .

We kn ow that ign o ran ce in th e life i s a lack

o f kn owl edge s o we try to i n cul cat e kn owledge
,

i n th e mind o f the ign oran t person When that .

knowledge comes then the condition o f ign orance

,

has pa ssed away S o it is wi th darkn es s It i s the

. .

turning away o f the earth from the sun which

causes it If at n o t ime th e earth had ever
.

turn ed away from the sun we should n eve r have

understood about the light but because o f th e ,

absence o f the light we have come to kn ow that

l ight is a reality an d that darkn ess is simply a
,

lack o f light Wh en we learn to apply thi s l

. aw

o f contradictories to everything in life we sh all ,

find that l ife love and truth are the etern al

,

verities and whatever contradicts o r denies

,

them is at best only a vain i maginati on in the

mi n d of man The r e i s this s eemin g evi l h ow
.
,

e ver which cont radict s God an d H is creati on

,

f ro m the greatest to the lea s t o f things in H is

Univer se But when we com e to un derstan d
.

that the something i s on ly the shadow in t he

backgrou nd we shall n ot attach impo rtan c e to
it no r endow the con tradictorie s wi th li fe or
,

powe r Yet becau s e we have made mu ch o f th e

.
 Th e Creation o f a World 1 89

s eeming in the past it ha s had apparen tly as

,

gre at e ff ect u pon u s as reality i ts elf .

When we kn ow that at th e heart o f l i fe there

is no evil that we are working f rom the center
,

to the circumferen ce an d all o w ou r l i ve s t o b e

,

come thoroughly i n spired by the en ergy which

lies back of the mind o r by the great invisible
,

world o f feelin g which is the dyn ami c tha t

,

move s the universe al lo ur tho u ght o f lif e shall

,

become ren ewed an d we shall t ruly u n de rs tand

h ow t o l ove Th e inner feeling sh all flood the
.

mi nd b ringin g with i t all the glow an d color

,

o f life and our th o ughts becomi ng s urcha rged

,

with energy will generate li ving th i ngs in life

, .

In this way we wi ll so ren ew the sub consciou s -

min d with positive thought pictures that the -

,

seeming picture s of sin dis ease an d death shall

, ,

van i s h f rom li fe an d leave n ot even the dis

,

tu rb an ce o f a disagre e abl e dream We shal l .

have left th e n ight of life behi n d ; it will have

passed away an d we shall have en tered into
,

the m ornin g of a n ew day .

O ur lives are committed into our own care ;

we can be wha t we wil l to be but i t i s only ,

through vital thin kin g that we becom e what w e

will to be Thin ki n g s erves the purpos e of using
.

en ergy an d gi vin g it form but though we ,

must unde rstan d that the soul within us i s one

with the Un i versalS oul that it can come in to
,
19 0 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

con sciou s relationship with the Uni versal So ul ,

we m u st also r em ember that this is not m e rely

a thought proc e ss -
E nt e r thy cl o se t an d shu t
.

thy door E nte r into the heaven ly consci ous

.

n ess o f life shut ou t the c onsciousness o f

,

things Rem e mb e r that th e mind of man stan ds

.

relate d on the on e side to the world o f form and ,

on the othe r side t o the forml e s s world th e ,

wo rld o f causati on Th e cau se is not the fo rm

. .

Th e cause i s the e ternal energy which perm eate s

everything in the universe .

Go d is not s epa rate and apart from H is

c re ati on E v erything is throbbing with life th e
.
,

v e ry stone s unde r ou r feet are pe rmeated with

it We are coming to s ee that eve rything h a s
.

life and int ellige nce according to its need or to ,

the demand that i t makes for them that the ,

mo re m e n get of this invisible ene rgy the mo re

they shall e xpre ss When the y exp re s s poverty
.
,

sickn ess o r d e ath i t is because they are n ot

, ,

d rawing fully and freely from the Source o f

Life . It is b e cau s e the mind has become s o
absorbed in th e extern al world that i t i s n o
long er able t o come into vital touch with the
wo rld o f caus e s E nte ring thy cl o set i s shu ttin g
.

things out of t h e mind is bringing about a

,

state of repos e and peace an d thi s i s nece ssa ry

,

in o rd er to acqu i re power .

Wh en w e have the realization o f power then ,

1 92 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

we might say a reflection of man s pas t an d ’

p re sen t .

One can understan d why th e creati on of th e

wo rld ha s been a slow p roce s s when o ne con
sid ers h ow little ori ginal though picturing we -

have when one thinks o f th e many minds eu

,

gaged in thin king dead th ought s o f bygone age s

whi ch can a dd little o r nothing to the p re sent
c reati on I f we could think and feel that life is
.

an e t ernal process without beginning and wi th

.

ou t ending that lif e is t rying to expres s i ts el f

,

th rough us tha t Go d is wo rking through ma n

,

in o rder to make H imself manife st u pon earth ,

we should th e n c on s ci ously co operate with H is

-

pow e r and exp ress Go d s work in a perfe ct way

,
’
.

B e fore a child can be bo rn i nto the world o f

form i t must recapitulat e everything from the ,

ve ry protoplasm in which its form beg a n

th rough e v ery stage of the way up in the evol u ,

tion of the physical organ ism becau se th e ,

physical child epitomizes the world i n which it

li ve s Later in the life it must r e ca pitulate th e
.

m ental history o f the world f rom savage ry on

,

up to its own st age of development H avin g .

passed out o f that it must take up as it were

, , ,

an ew th e p roce ss o f c re ati on an d carry it on

, , ,

so that i n th e ge n erations to come the b oy or

gi rl will re capitulate not only the past but al
, l ,

that has bee n acqu i red in this pre sent li fe .

 Th e Creation o f a World 1 93

Th e c i rcle o f li fe is ever growi n g larger an d

la rger ; the ci rcl e of kn owled ge is ever growing
g re a t er an d gre a t er
. Ye s we c
,an c on s ci o usly
s o co Op erat e with the law s of life tha t mo re
-

can b e acco mpl i shed i n on e year n ow than w ould

h ave bee n poss ible in a ge neration o f the past ,

when we were al lunc on scious th at life was an

e ver un foldi n g p roc es s
-
. We had n o thought in
th e p ast th at al lthi n gs we r e ours because we
h ad made the m ; that all things were s ubject to
u s beca use we had c r eate d them We th ought
.

o urselve s ruled by thin gs i n stead o f rul i ng t hem

, .

We are n ow coming to a kn owledge that we

s h o uld have domi n ion an d power o ver things

becau se they are les s than we in the s cal e o f

crea tion becau s e they are simply a m ean s to an
,

en d whereby we work ou t a co m pl et e s alvation .

Th e worki ng ou t o f sal vation depends upon

—
what we are able t o do h ow we develop each
f acul ty of mi nd s o that the expressi on o f all
,

th e faculti e s bec ome s perfe c t in the physical

world . We are con sciously cc Operatin g with-

th e G od that is wi thi n u s That i s the only way

.

in which we can l ook a t it God is wo rking

.

thro ugh men to create a n ew world an d this is ,

fi rs t of al lan i n di v idual c rea ti on in the lif e o f

,

th e man Power an d Wisdom are devel op e d i n

.

every i n d i vi dual s o that each come s a t last to

,

con trol th e full force of his own life in a per

1 94 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

fe et way an d through such con t rol al

, lo u ter ex
pres si on chan ge s a n d assum es new form an d
c olo r This is n ot mi racle worki ng
. It is .

kn owl e dge and conformity to law Wha teve r .

has been don e in this wo rld o r in an y othe r ha s

been accomplished through th e ope rati on of law ,

o r rather th rough kn o wledge an d app lication

of l aw We are t old that Jesus rul e d th e ele

.

ments H e wa s abl e to command th e s ea to be

.

still the w av es to c ease But no one ca n rule

,
.

the external el em ents until he has first le arn ed

t o rule the elements in hi s own life J e su s sa i d : .

G reat e r thi n gs than these shall ye do .

!

Re m emb e r that the New World wi ll co m e

when a st ron g de si re fo r it awakens in the mi n d
o f man M a n must first lea rn to rule the e l
. e

ments in his own nature H e must comma n d .

th e sto rms to c ease an d the se a to be still H is .

mind must be b rought into subj e ction to the

Uni versal Will H e must l ea r n to control his
.

e ve ry thought and th rough such control ev e ry

,

action will be pe r fect e d Th e v ictory is to be

.

gained within and th e battl e will continue un til

,

body sense and mind will r e spond t o Unive r s al

, ,

Spi rit The end of th e old wo rld will ha v e

.

come an d the New World will have begun to

,

tak e fo rm an ea rthly world fa shioned after a

—
H e a venly plan wh e n th e v ic to ry i s w on
— Re .

member that man ep itomiz es n ot only the

1 96 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

There wi ll be n o mo re love of gai n Nei ther

.

l there be p reacher or teacher, f or al

wi l lthe
world shall be taught of the Spiri t .

H ol y men of old fo re saw and p rophesi ed con

cern ing the coming o f a New World E very .

li ving soul on this plane t if l e d by the Spi rit

, ,

may become a force in bringing to pass the a c

ceptab l e year o f the Lo rd . With Un i on of s o ul ,

and mind and truly directed action will vi c

, ,

tory be won by the force s o f Love an d Li ght .

Th e nigh t is fa r s pent th e day is at han d !

,

H e who is on the m ountai n top can s ee the fi r st

-

gl eam o f the eternal day H e wh o is in th e

.

vall ey must wai t until the comin g sun floods th e

earth with a n ew won der an d a n ew glory H e .

that hath eyes shall s ee an d he that ha th ea rs

,

s ha ll hea r wh at the S p irit a l on e reveal

eth .
 THE CO NTROLLE D LI FE

Kn ow thyself then through su ch kn owl

,

edge en ter i n to that domi n i on an d powe r ove r

al l th in gs which were p rophe si ed from the b e
g inn i n g of tim e .

Rem ember it is n ot through th e el imi nati on

,

o f self tha t the vict ory i s gai n ed but th rough ,

k n owl edge an d cont rol In in divi dualized life

.

al l movem en t begi n s at the cen ter the I !

, .

Th e I Am is at the hea rt of all life ev er ,

worki n g withi n to will and to do It m anife st s .

first to th e in di vi dual an d we call it the real

,

self the in di vidual s elf an d in reaching out i t

, ,

touch e s an d becomes on e with alllife an d we ,

ca ll th is the Un iver sal Self o r the great Co smi c

,

—
Co nsci ou sn e ss the at on e m ent betwee n God
- -

a n d ma n . B efore we can be at on e with the

Un iv ersal we must realiz e the un ity o f the in
,

—
divi dual life soul min d an d s en se m ust work
, , ,

together in harmony Th e wa rring an d clas h

.

in g b etween wha t i s term ed th e higher an d the

lower min d mu st cea s e .

Th at which we call evi l i n u s is but th e par

tial the in complete When we expan d to our
, .

1 91
1 98 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

full natu re we wi ll fin d that there i s n o evi l

, ,

that good alone i s the allin all We shall ceas e

- -
.

talking about ou r dua l natu re s and beli eving ,

—
th at we are c ompo site be ings z ea rthly and
heavenly Becau s e we shall kn ow that eve ry
.

thing has its origi n in th e uns een realm of

S piri t an d mov e s f rom thence out in o rder to
, ,

find expre s si on in fo rm We call the expres

.

sion matter an d we call the cause o f it Spirit

, .

I t is b ut di ff erent degree s of en ergy in man if es

tation : Th e oute r fo rm is the ev idenc e o f th e
inner power It is n ot right then for us to
.
, ,

think of one pa rt o f us as being good an d n u

—
other evi l o f on e p art being earthly an d an
othe r hea ve nly Th e process that is goin g on is
.

e volutiona ry ; the spiri tu al id eal of image an d

liken e ss of the whole is se eking oute r expr e s
sion the mind s en se an d body do not as yet
, ,

fully con fo rm to the inne r id eal of life but exist ,

only in a parti al or incompl ete way In th e .

fulln e ss of time th e h eaven in us will become

manife st and the Uni ve rsal Will will b e done
,

the Kingdom of G od will have come on ea rth .

B ody an d s e nse ha ve n ot an in de pen dent ex

is ten ce ; th ey a re outgrowths o f mi n d as truly
a s mi n d is an ou tgrt o f soul Individu al .

soul is of on e an d th e s am e substan c e as Uni

ve r sal Spi rit Univer sal Spi rit is al
. linclusiv e -
,

e mb racing and comp reh en ding everyth in g in the

20
0 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

to whom little i s given of him li ttle is requi red

, .

S ometimes we const ruct in mind i dea l s f or

others to follow without thin kin g tha t in so
,

doing we a re going to be j udged by th em ou r

selv e s an d when we fail or fall sho rt o f li ving
,

those ideals we stan d j ust as mu ch convicted

,

o f s in as if we h ad made the m for ourselves .

We can see h ow impo s s ible it is then fo r u s to , ,

have two s ets of ideal s—o n e for others an d an

other for ours elves We ca nnot thi n k an yth in g
.

for another pe rson without thin ki ng i t f or our

selves Al . lth e rewards an d all th e pun i shm ent s
o f life c ome fr o m o u r c on fo rmity o r fai lure to

c onform t o our ideals .

l
S u perficialy i t w ould
, s ee m as t h o ugh i t
wou ld be bette r for us if we were on ly po s
se ssed o f a little kn owl e dge B ut we shou ld .

kn ow this : That always f rom the cen ter o f l ife

there is the pushin g o f that in n er life for ex
pre ssion in outer form It is s omethi n g we .

can not stop something that will n ot be p u t

,

aside an d th ere fo r e we go on an d m u st go o n
, , ,

kn owing m ore an d more al lthe ti me and b e ,

cau s e of th e kn owi n g doing more Thu s wi th

, .

every n ew ideal in life co mes th e in creas ed t e

sponsibility of li ving tha t ideal .

Th e cont rol o f s elf doe s n ot begi n on th e

su r face o f life It is n ot the cont rol of a n y
.

outer act Rememb er that the spoken w ord an d

.
 The Con trol
led Life 0
2 1

th e outer a ct on ly express the motive an d

though t pi ct ure that li e s back o f wo rd an d act
-
,

t herefore if you could s u ceed i n suppressing

,

word or act an d still have wrong thought and

,

f eeli ng the re would be no self co ntrol

,
-
Some .

time s people say that outwa rdly they were pe r

f ectl ca lm an d c ollec t ed but inwa r dly th ey w ere
y
s eethingly an gry a n d they looked upon th e oute r
,

con diti on s as bein g cont rol Al . l t ru e c ontrol

begins with th e en e rgy o f l ife itself There are .

m any di ff erent soul attributes and allthese soul

—
qualiti e s e ach a d eve y on e of them n ee ds
n r —
to be f reely an d fully e xpre s sed There are .

n umberle s s things that s e rve to reta r d such ex

p r ession S
. o met imes ou r o wn thoughts : we do
n ot wan t to express wh at we fe e l I t i s the .

mind s way o f looking at life an d i t i s the

’
,

mind s superficia l thought that fails to s e e that

’

the on e great obj ect an d efi ort of li fe is to fully

expre s s its elf .

O n e of the greatest thi ngs i n li fe is the per

f eet exp re s si on of self yet s ometi mes that is
,

th e thi n g we t ry th e ha rdest to supp re ss be ,

c au se we do n ot wan t othe rs to kn ow how we

feel or thin k Such a men tal con dition may
.

com e from the c onven tion al side of life becau s e ,

we thin k i t is n ot th e right thing to do ; or it

may come through the m in d s being s o th or
’

oughly engros sed in mate ri al or extern althi n gs

 0
2 2 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

that it lo ses sight of the in teri or life ; or agai n

i t may come from the pres sure o f en vi ron m en t ,

or the act i on o f oth e r people s l ives on our own

’
.

We s ay that we would like to be ourselve s but ,

bec au se o f the pre s sure brought to bear upon us

b y other s th at we can not be ou r n atu ral s elves
, .

When we take tha t pos ition we are tryi ng to

shift the respon sibi li ty from our own shoulde r s
to oth e rs ’
I f on e wills to expres s himself th e
.
,

wi ll i ngn es s t o d o so i s a p roc es s tha t shall t e

move one obstacle after an oth er until the fu ll ,

an d c omplete expr es si on com es But if we .

sh ould allow al l our th oughts and feelin gs to

exp ress th em s elve s fully an d f reely witho u t a n y ,

regard to the fo rm they took th en s uch ex ,

pression might not be advisabl e to the high e s t

o rder in ou r own lives or i n th e lives o f oth e r
people This then i s wh ere clear th o ugh t
.
, ,

pi cturing come s i n to regulate and dire ct e x

pressi on .

Al lt rue exp res sio n is the un in te r ru pted a cti o n

o f th e i nner i deal O ne man without much o f
.

an y plan goe s to w ork an d c on st ructs a ver y

crude building whi le an ot her man with a b e au

,

tiful plan takes the same mate ri al an d con stru ct s

a n a rtisti c buil di n g out o f it Th e ene r gy in
.

e ach life i s the same but on e had con structe d a

,

beauti ful i de al in mind and as i t took form in

,

life it manifested th e oute r beauty of the inne r

,
204 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

kn owledge that he i s inj uring hi ms elf quite as

much as anyone else E ve ry false emotion is
.

d e st ructi v e It tears down i t dest roys or h in

.
,

d e rs wha t the true emot i on s of Love an d Faith

a re building up When we lea rn the lesson th a t
.

the great Naza ren e ta ught we wi ll kn ow that ,

all resistance o f other people s false emotion s ’

by gene rating the same emotions in ourselve s

is us e l es s
. An y w rong con dition is only over
come by substituting for i t a t rue on e Al lth e .

e vil that hurts or inj ure s comes because it fin d s

,

some point o f con ta ct i n u s : I f we have ov e r

come the false emoti ons in our own lives n o ,

false emoti on such as an ger or hat e can pen e

t r ate int o ou r con sciou s mind to distu rb or ma k e
u s un re stful In the truly controlled life th in g s
.
,

of e ve ry kind bec ome subor dinate t o li fe Th e .

body must be come subordi n a te t o min d an d th at ,

in t u rn to sou l .

Let u s try to c onsciously un derstan d th i s

that w e hav e within us this creati v e power an d ,

that it is possible th rough ou r desi re s to dra w

mor e and mo r e of that pow er f rom the un s een
sou rc e of life t o what ever degre e we may n eed
,

it Th e inn er light wh en i t h as pe r fect o utflow

.
,

into the mind o f man illuminates its every ,

thought Ea ch thought picture is en d owe d with

.
-

light and color that would n ot b e pos sible i f

this i n n er light we re shu t out by sorrow doubt , ,
 Th e Con trol
led Life 05
2

an g uish despa i r coming between the mi n d an d

or

it E v erythin g look s dark ev erythin g looks

.
,

cloudy there is n o desire for light

,
— we los e am
bi tiou B ut just a s soon as the clouds clea r
.

a way be twe en m an s m i n d an d his i n n er con

’

s ciou s n es s t h en all the beauty c omes i n to bei n g

,

a ga i n an d fl oods the wh o le life

, .

We t ry to m ake the min d s life harmon i ou s ’

b y s ha pin g oute r con dition s We say that th e

.

mi n d ha s bec ome fi red the body sick an d a , ,

ch a nge o f sc en e i s goi n g to ren e w the mi n d a n d

make the b ody well S ometime s apparen tly a

.

ch a nge o f s cen e s ucceeds in doi n g thi s then ,

a g ai n i t fail s If through chan ge of scen e the

.
,

min d is called a way from the un plea san t

t h i n gs we h av e been thinking about and the ,

wrong thi n gs we ha v e bee n doing so that it i s

n o l on ger cen t ered on t he purely person al self ,

we m ay derive ben efit ; but if we carry with u s

th e ol d th ough t u pon which we have been dwell
—
in g an d t he wron g feelings i f we carry th o se
,

weakn esse s i n t o ou r n ew en vi ron m en t th e ,

ch an g e of s cen e is o f n o benefit .

B y cu l ti vating th e inn e r light through medi ,

tatian min d an d body are ren ewed and quick

,

en ed In ti me we al
. lcom e to kn ow this ; we are
n ot al ways con s cio us o f it at first b ecaus e l ike , ,

alln ew habi ts it ha s to be thoroughly established

,

be f ore we can gain much help from it an d yet ,

206 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

when on ce acqui red it wi ll brin g to u s un told

,

gain .

In the mas te ry o f self the recogn ition of

po wer comes firs t The mi n d should picture or
.

image the thing it de sires to expres s an d then ,

through foc usin g or cen teri ng the thought up on

it feeling the real
, tiy of i t we begi n to giv e i t
,

form Th e more perman en t the men tal pi ct u re

.

is th e mo re las ti ng will be com e its physical ex

,

pression in the physi cal world I f we h ow or .

expect to retai n our bodies fo r man y m ore years

than we do at the pre sen t ti me i t will com e ,

th rou gh pos itiv e thi n king an d feelin g If we .

think of a body that i s as i mmo rtal as the s o ul ,

in the proces s of ti me we shall fin d the bo d y

b ecoming i mmortaliz e d livi n g on until throu gh
,

th e knowl edge that is withi n u s we shall ha ve ,

the pow e r to lay down th e body or to take i t u p

according to our will We sh all do this best by
.

th e h elp of two great factors in life O n e we .

cal l m editat ion F or this we calm the mind s o

.

that w e can he ar th e sti l l small voice an d b e !

,

come consciously r elated to the uni versal soul ,

from which w e draw al l our life and in te l

li
ge nce We might speak of the i n n e r conscious
.

n e ss as th e H oly of H ol ie s the foun tain h e ad ,

o f all life Th rough such commun ion the in

.
,

di vidual life b e comes i ns pi red become s filled ,

with a desire to express in this world m ore of

208 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

kn owledge neces sa ry t o acquire power an d to ,

rightly direct the use o f power O n e may b e .

la cking i n self control so th at h e does n ot ex

-
,

press all that he might sin cerely wish to ex

press He may feel an d think that other s are
.

ca pable of doi n g what he himself i s un abl e to

do But for his en c ouragem en t let me sa y that
.

he has withi n himself eve ryth in g that is n ecos

sa ry to develop th e con trolled life an d h e can ,

consci ously set to work to accomplish what an y

on e else has d on e H e can n ot do this by aim
.

lessly trying to copy som eon e else but by ex ,

p re ssing himself through str ong t ru e desire an d ,

conscious e ff ort for a con trolled life .

Th e con trolled lif e is n ev er a copy of an y

oth er l i fe It n ever i mitates b ut always
.
,

ori gi n ates It i s far better for an yon e to ex

.

press what h e feels and thi n k s even if i t i s only ,

a little than it i s to try to gi ve expres sion

,

through h is own mind of what s omebody e lse

has felt an d thought Li fe i s n ot lived by proxy
. .

E ach i n divi dual must live his own life u s e hi s ,

own p o wer think his own thoughts i n other

, ,

w ords must expres s him self n o matt er what he

, ,

i s o r where h e i s Otherwise the life is a dead

.

empty thin g a graveyard o f dead thoughts an d

,

fe el ings a life without amb ition or exp r es si on

, .

One mu s t both s ee an d take pleas ure in the

wo rk o f hi s own mi n d an d han ds H e must .
 l
The Con trole d Life 09
2

p l an
, a n d he m us t ex e c ute i f he , w o ul d en t er
into th e s atisfacti on of living Th e in n er li fe
.

must be cen tered in th e Un iversa l Will but th e ,

Universal Willmu s t fin d its expres s i on through

individual efi ort .

God and man a re on e God is the li fe an d

.

in telligen ce an d man i s the in strum en t through

,

which that life an d intel l igen ce acts Th e on e .

who lives a con trolled life re alize s the t ru th o f

,

this , I in them an d thou in M e and that we

, ,

may be made pe rfec t in the one B ut the O n e

.
!

n e s s of Life fin ds express io n in a div e rsi ty o f

forms So man using th e on e power an d the

.
,

one in t elligence doe s so through man y f acu l

,

ties of mind an d the se faculties w orki ng to

,

geth er produce perfect physical action An d .

thi s acti on tends towards the building of a b etter

wo rld ; a wo rld that can alone be creat e d through
efi ort o f mind and body ; a world that whi l e ,

comin g from within is being unfolded without

, .

It i s only the life that i s unde r full control that

can a cc ompli s h thi s in a thoroughly satisfacto ry

way E nergy an d in t elligence have n ot been

.

given to som e men an d withheld from oth e rs

, .

I t i s expected of all that n o matter whether

,

they hav e develope d on e tal ent or many th e ,

values o f each s hall be use d to thei r full ca

p a city ,
an d tha t through this use a stil l g re at e r
developm en t s hall take plac e We are the
.
21 0 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

keepers o f our own lives We have the po wer

.

within ourselves to guide an d direct life in ac

corda n ce with the law s wri tt en i nto our h e art s

and mind s We ca n make our li ves what we

.

will t o make th em We can fill them with

.

strength and beauty that wi ll make th e w o rld

bett e r beca use we are li ving in i t Th e indi .

vi dual must reach hi s own decisi on as to what

he propo ses t o do with his own life Wh e th e r .

he will make i t a li fe that willtruly r epresent

th e di v in e plan or one i n which the force an d
,

intell igence seem scattered far an d wi de on e ,

wh erei n there is n o real c on trol b u t a life that

,

i s dis sipated through vain i magi n ati on s o r

thought pictures that exalt themselve s aga in st
-

a knowledge of God .

Let those wh o de si re healt h and happi n es s ,

an d the re al suc c e s s of li fe kn ow th at such a im s

,

can be att ained through m edi ta tion con cen tra ,

t ion the con scious formin g o f thought pic t u r es

,
-

that will brighten an d uplift an d a true de si re

,

to give o f their own fullnes s whatever it may ,

be to a needy wo rld
, In d oin g thi s they a r e
.

planti n g the se ed whi ch sh allb ri n g fo rth a b oun

tiful harvest .
212 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

g i vi n g impo ver is he s t he g i ver an d is o,f n o re al

ben efit to th e receiver Ri ghteous gi vin g t e .

s pon ds to some n eed or l ack wh i ch bei n g s u p ,

plied ben efits the recei ver I f there is n o n eed

, .
,

g i vi n g w i ll pr o fi t n ei th er the g i ver n o r th e t e

ceiver . Give to him who as keth of thee an d ,

from h im who would bo rrow of thee t urn thou ,

n ot away . Wh en th e appea l com e s out o f a

!

n eed an d pre sen ts i ts elf to an y on e it com e s in

, ,

o rd er th at n ot on ly the receiver but that the ,

g i ver a l s o s h
, o u l d p r o fit b y s uch g ivi n g .

B ut on e may as k h ow i s it po s s ible th at both

, ,

should profit ! Supposin g for in stan ce that th e , ,

g i v in g is th a t o f p urel y m a t eri a l t hin g s It .

looks on the s urface as though in takin g thi s

course the receiver w ould profit and the g iver

wo ul d lose Such h owever is n ot the cas e E x

.
, , .

tern al wealth is at best symbolic o f s pi ri tual

, ,

we alth I f anyon e gives the mate rial th in g

'

without pu tting hea rt or life in to the gi vi n g h e ,

g i v e s u n gra c io u s ly u n k,in dl y an d b e
, com es le ss
clo sely related to the rec e i vin g .

I t is n ot on ly expected o f us that we sh oul d

g ive o f w h a tever w e h a ve bu t th a
, t w e s h o uld
put somethin g of ours elve s in to the givin g ; an d
becaus e we are followin g a lawful o rderly p roc ,

es s o f li fe our gifts bec om e li vin g thin gs

, ,

ben efici al alike to the gi ver an d th e re ci pi en t .

We s eldom real iz e th at all th e thought pic -

 Th e Law o f Reciprocity 213

tu res we weave in min d may become a legacy

fo r future good ; that what we t hi n k an d do
fo r others we are in real i ty th in kin g an d doin g
, ,

for ours elves ; an d that what on e give s out of

the fulln ess o f his own li fe retu rn s again to
,

ble s s the l i fe o f th e giver .

Th e vi n e th at is carefully ten ded an d f erti liz ed

repays th e own er in the qu an ti ty an d qua lity of

the grapes for all his care an d expen di ture

, .

Th e fa rmer wh o toil s in the ea rly spri ng is t e

wa rded in the aut umn .Th e bu sin ess man wh o
j u diciou sly in vests h is mon ey in the buyin g o f
good s is later on repai d th rough their sale No .

m atter what depa rtment o f li fe we investigate ,

we shallfin d from first to l ast that givi n g an d ,

receivin g recei vin g an d gi vi n g are essenti al

, , .

Th e studen t in hi s efi ort to impart kn owl

,

ed ge to min d s l e ss developed than hi s own ,

make s clearer to his own mind through s u ch

eff o rt the kn owledge he would impart When .

on e t rie s thro ugh men tal o r physical efi ort

, to ,

work out f or an other some problem in min d or

matte r he is j ust as t ruly wo rkin g out that
,

prob lem for h ims elf .

Th e on ly h armon io u s adjustmen t th at can

com e to an yon e in life is through th i s l a w of

reci procity Th e mind need n ot con cern its elf

.

so mu ch wi th the ques tion of h ow to receive ,

as with th e t h oug ht o f h ow be st to gi ve It i s.
214 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

th r ough gi vin g that th e recei vin g comes It is .

th rough the ri ght ful us e of everythin g com

mitted to our care th at th e larger thin gs com e
in to our lives .

Th e rel ation sh ip is establish ed between pe o ple

th ro ugh recip roc ity We may become r elate d
.

to people on on e si de who have some particula r

n eed wh i ch we have th e po wer to reli eve or it ,

may be that we can impa rt somethin g which

makes their l ive s ri cher fo r the recei vin g An d .

in the sam e way through su ch gi vin g we b e

, ,

come related to people who have somethin g to

g i ve u s We . can gi ve i n a w ay th a t can ble s s

th e gran d bo dy of h uman ity or we can gi v e in ,

a way th at wi l l t en d to make parasite s of h u m an

bein gs .

What on e feel s th in ks or does f or othe rs b e

,

come s pa rt an d parcelof his own li fe Ri gh t .

eou s givin g i s alway s t he hel pi n g o f peop le to

help themselves and an y philan th ropy which

,

concern s i tself with doing mo re than this acts ,

as a hi n drance to hum an developmen t If a .

man does n ot work n ei ther sh all he eat

, Wo rk.
!

is n ecessa ry to the full developmen t of l i fe an d ,

if an yone d epri ve s another of necessary work ,

he i s n ot adjuste d to life e i ther f or h is own

,

g oo d, o r f o r the g oo d o f o t hers .

O n an y plan e of be in g wo rk is n ece ssary to

,

growth We grow physically stron g as we u se

.
2 16 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

because the adj ustmen t to li fe i s from with in ,

an d ext ern al l aw wi ll on ly bri n g th e life in to

greater bon dage It is truth in the in d ivi dual

.

th at ma ke s h im free In th e perfect reci p roci ty

.

of l i fe there i s perfect freedom Gi vin g sh ould

.

be ju st as free as recei vin g .

Th e pa rt o f wi sdom is n ei ther to b e prodi gal

n or to be m i s erly in o ur givi ng Th e pro digal
.

scatters the seed s by th e waysi de or pe rchan ce

on fertile so il bu t he has n o rea l k n owledge tha t
,

his giving is an eff o rt to stillor qui et his con

s c i ence ; he m ay feel th at he h as been self in -

du l g en,t t h at he h a s s p en t hi s t i m e an d mo n e y
in e ff o rt s directed to s atis fyin g hi s person al de
sires and something within tell s him that this is
n ot suffi ci en t to h i s own happines s H e g ive s
.

in order to s ti ll o r quiet this v oice whi ch c om es

t o him from within but there i s li ttle thought in
,

h is mind o f what we term righteo us giving .

By and by he fin ds himself i n n eed an d while

some may give to him the great maj o rity will
,

refrain from gi v ing using as an argumen t that

,

he never used his pos sessi ons in a wi se way an d

therefore they feel that anything they m ight
give would be squandered in un righteo us living
or giving . Thu s is shown that s u ch givi ng is
un lawful ; that all lawful giving brin gs it s true
reward an d the on e wh o gives is n o poo rer b e
ca us e o f h is giving .
 Th e Law f
o Reciprocity 21 7

A gain with the mi ser we have the other ex

t reme ; h e refrai n s altogether from gi vin g or
i f he gives at al lit is gi ven grudgingly and b e ,

cause he takes thi s cou r se he shuts out t ru e re

ceivin g and in hi s n eed he i s fa r less lik ely to

recei v e than the prodigal wh o scatters hi s

w e alth without tho ugh t o f whether i t i s going to
b e ben efic i al o r otherwise Th e mi ser whi l e b e
.

i n g in pos sessi on o f great extern a l wealth is

n evertheles s poo r be ca us e
, as a man thinke th
,

in his heart so i s he H is wealth falls so sho rt

!
.

o f his des i res that in h is mi n d he is li t eral l y in

a state o f po ve rty frequently carrying his mis

,

e rly thought an d ac tion to such a d egree that h e

o ften fai ls to nouri sh h is own body th r ough t he

u s e of s ufli cien t wholes ome food A miser is

.

o n e wh o s huts the do o r on his own happi

n e s s an d peace o f mi nd H e is in th e state o f
.

const ant fe ar over the po ssible l o ss o f his ea rthly

p ossess i o n s a n d fe ar hath torm e nt .

!

S omewhere between the prodigal an d th e

miser is t o be found the happy m e an where a ,

man realizin g the wo rth of h is poss e ssi ons i s

g oing t o g i v e freely and sp o ntaneous l y to s u p ,

p yl real n eeds , an d such giving as is always g o

i n g to be p rodu ct ive o f good .

In i mpa rt ing kn owledge to an other s mind ’

o n e should always c onside r wh e th e r such kn owl

e dge is go ing t o p rove o f help to th e recipien t .

21 8 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

Th e wo rld i s full o f people wh o wish to acquire

kn owledge o ften for selfish en ds an d purposes .

There are als o m any people wh o se curiosi ty i s

the underlying m otive while the re are othe rs wh o

,

pri de themselve s with sto ri ng the mi n d with an

a ccum ulati on o f fact s n ot for an y particular
,

good that can come from such an accum ulati on

o f kn owledge but rather t o grati fy their own
,

van ity that they may appea r to be wi se in th e

,

ey es of the i r fell o wm en It is worse than foll y

.

to give o r try to gi ve kn owledge t o such as

thes e f or on e would simply be scattering th e s ee d
,

by the wayside an d i t would never be producti ve

o f goo d and n o one n eed expe ct an y return from
,

such gi ving Again th e re are the self satis fied

.
-

pe ople wh o are n either kn ocking or see king y e t ,

be cause on e m ay want them to thin k an d b e

liev e as he d oes an efi ort may be put fort h to
,

impart kn owledge an d understanding but all ,

such e ff ort must of a n ec e ssity fai l b e caus e ,

it is not based on the t rue thought o f lawful gi v

ing Neverthel e s s there is an imparting o f
.

kn owledge where the seed i s go ing to fall o n

good groun d wh e re peo ple are hunge ring an d
,

thi rsting and if on e is in po ssession o f kn owl

,

edge s o that he can supply the n eeds of those

wh o hunge r an d thirst an d re frains f rom d o in g
s o he is shutting off the so u rce of h is own s up
,

ply But i f he gives f reel y an d fully th e n

.
,
22 0 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

make them free from the law of s in an d death ,

in savi ng their live s we sho uld sa ve ou rselves

f rom a m ul titude of sin s ; be cau s e in sh owin g ,

them the way of li fe we should be picturin g it

,

in a clear an d un m istakable way f or o ur s elve s ,

an d the i mpres s o f th at th o ught pict ure wo u ld

-

be on e that would rem ain with u s to ble ss an d

lighten o ur own lives We s ee peo ple su fi erin g
.

f ro m the pain of a di sea sed body I f we c o uld.

sho w them that it is possible f or the min d to b e

come s o tho roughly ren ewed wit h th e Spiri t of
Li fe that the wh ole physi ca l o rgan ism would
re spon d to it we should be helping the m to a
,

be tte r understan ding o f life an d a mo re com

,

p lete e xp re ssio n o f i t Ther

. e i s alw ays on e way
or a hund red ways open whereby we can gi ve to
those that a re in need Where is the kind wo rd
.
,

th e pleasan t look the h elpful hand ! These are

,

always t ru e m e thods o f righteous givin g Th e .

gi v ing to an other o f one s faith an d belief is a

’

pot ent caus e o f a greater awaken in g of faith

in that other s life
’
.

Our thoughts an d feelin gs are con tin ually go

in g out from us callin g as it were the sam e
, , ,

thoughts and feelin gs to awaken in o ther lives .

We a re always gi v in g righ teously if we are giv

ing gifts w h ich st rengt hen or uplift gi ft s that ,

make it e asi e r for another to live life as it sho uld

b e li ve d If we k ee p ou r minds inspired by fa ith
.
,
 Th e Law o f Reciprocity 22 1

by h ope , by courage by s weetn e ss an d by light

, ,

we a tt ract from other mi nd s a s ti ll greater abun

dan c e o f that whi ch we h ave in ou r own It is .

th e light in li fe that grows brighter beca use of

its u s e.

Let us n ot gi ve w ith an y th o ugh t o f rec e iv

in g Let u s gi ve fo r the sake o f gi vi ng Let u s

. .

love fo r the sake o f lovin g an d not f or the re

,

tu rn we may rec e ive from th e loving Let .

us li ve in a spontan eou s way con tin uall y ,

g i v i n g ou t o f o ur fullness w h e re i t i s g o i n g
to do good withou t t ho ught o f reward with
, ,

ou t tho ught o f self ; losing s e lf as it w e re in

, ,

o u r th ought fo r oth e rs in the do ing and caring

,

for the man y I f we l ive this law o f giving our

.
,

every n eed will be s uppl ied an d we sh a l l t e ,

ceive a s fre ely a s we give .

There is a s much righteou s re cei ving a s th e re

is ri ghteous givin g . No one shoul d turn away
f rom the receivi n g tha t bl e ss es with th e thought,

o r feeling th at he i s suffi c ien t unto hims el f He .

should receive as fre ely a s he has gi ven n ot a s ,

a reward f or h i s gi vi n g bu t that th e law of life

,

may b e ful filled through his re ce iving an d ,

k n owin g that t hrough greater rec e iving wi l l

come the s ti l l gr e at e r givin g .

Let n o fals e pride stan d i n the way o f t e

ceivin g . We kn ow that we re joic e in giving ;
th at we are happy because o f the giving Th en .
222 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

why sho uld we in terfere with the j oy o r the hap

pin e s s of an other w h o gi ve s to us !
Per fe ct adjustmen t to life is the l aw o f reci

procity I t doe s not n e ces sari ly mean that w e

.

shall giv e to one person an d receive agai n in t e

tu rn from that same person Th e law is that
.

we shall giv e wh e re a need exi sts an d t hat ,

wh e re a n ee d exi sts in our own life we shall t e

,

ceive . I f w e cast ou r bread upon the wate rs it ,

wi l l retu rn to us again in a fe w o r in many da ys .

As we giv e so sha l, l we rec eive of the same ki n d .

What soever a man soweth th at al so s hall he

,

reap .
224 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

result s that would flow fro m n atural breath in g .

One might say if brea thing is a n atural condi

tion why shoul d n ot all people breath e in a n at
,

u ral way ! Why should an y on e seek to a c

qu ire a n at ural an d controlled way o f brea th
ing ! My an swer is : that few people lead a
natural life and the bre athin g i s far mo re a f
f ected tha n alm ost anything els e if on e s life ’

do e s not conform to th e req uiremen t s of n at ural

law . De sire i s intimat el y related to breath .

One s eve ry desire ha s its immediate eff ect upon

’

th e b reath Strong tru e deep desi re s timu

.
, , ,
.

lates not only the mind but produce s a chan ge in

the action of th e b reath so that one beg i n s t o
b reath e an even a rhythmic breath we m igh t say
, , ,

f rom the cen te r o f th e physical organ i sm wh e r e

,

all true breathing shou l d have it s be ginni ng I n .

th e past we hav e suppo s e d that th e l un gs we re

th e sol e organ s o f breath but brea th does n ot
,

pen et rate to on e part of th e bo dy alon e Th e .

function of b reathing charact e rizes the whol e

body f rom h ead to foot Unde r a con troll ed
.

and directe d action th e breath can be made to

,

penet rat e or ci rculate among all the molecul es

o f the b ody hen ce th e whole o rgan ism m ay b e
,

said to breathe .

B re ath fin ds i ts cen te r at the di aphragm f or ,

this is th e t rue cen ter o f human bre ath Th e .

diaphragm divides th e abdomin al cavi ty from

 Th e B reath o f Life 22 5

th e tho racic acting a s a ceilin g to on e an d the

,

floo r to th e other and wh e n the b reath is di

,

rected f rom it the r e is a moveme nt of al

, lth e
o rgan s o f th e body bo th above and b el o w this
—
c ente r thi s tending to eq ualiz e both th e circu
lation of th e blood an d the n ervous system .

M or e att ention should be paid to diaph rag

matic breathi n g and everything which tend s
,

e ith e r men tally o r physical ly to inter fere with i t

should be corrected An emin ent physician ha s
.

said that nine tenths o f wom en are atrophi e d

-

—
b el ow the waist the re sult of tight d re ssing .

Th e po s s ibilit ies of cont rolled breath acti on

can n o t b e ove re stimate d No matter f rom
.

what point o f vi e w w e conside r th e sub

j ect i n all it s di ff erent b earings we can see
, ,

nothin g but good flowing from it I t give s .

elasticity and lightn e ss of body ; it i s beneficial

in ov e rcoming n ervous conditions and is in
v aluabl e in banishing insomnia Its ren ewing .

po wer is most marke d as i t tends to e stablish a

,

ha rm onio us vibrati on of all th e molecule s in th e

p hysi ca l fo rm
. T hr o ugh its proper us e cough s , ,

cold s an d o ther lung t rouble s wo uld b ecome

things of th e past It is u deniabl e that even
. n

at the present ti m e th e lungs a re not utiliz e d to

,

on e third o f th ei r ca pacity
-
It is s el f evident
.
-

tha t the organs of our bodi e s a re i ntended not ,

onl y fo r p roper but thoro ugh use If they are .

226 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

n ot used as th ey sh oul d be weakn ess will en

,

s ue — soon to be followed by di sea se an d death .

M any wh o hav e but li ttle kn owledg e of b reath

action feel n eve rth el e ss that its right us e must
,

be impo rtant ; othe rwi se th ey wo uld n ot recom

mend deep breathing as an ex e rcis e But whil e .
,

this i n itself may produce some good resul ts ye t ,

it is a very di ff e rent thing to kn ow an d t o us e

th e forc e in a c on s c ious an d i n tell igen t way .

We should t ry to understan d the po wer an d the

us e o f al l en ergy Rememb e r I d o not advocat e
.
,

an y physical ex e rc i se as bei n g i mport an t i n an d

o f its el f bu t rath e r th at when soul and mind

,

are at one all physica l ex erc i s e coming from this

adjustm en t wil l p rove o f u n told good It is an

.

i nne r e ff ort tow ard oute r exp re ssion I kn ow .

that we can mak e too much of th e eff ec ts o f

caus e s but i t i s n eve rthel ess t rue that we should
,

have as thorough a knowl e dge of both cause

an d e ff e ct as it is po ssibl e to have .

It i s th e outgoing b reath that requ i re s th e

m o st attention : on i ts perfect con trol dep en ds
to a ma rked degree the in coming b reath On ly .
!

as w e kn ow how to e xhal e can we i nhale a s we

should Natu re abhors a vac uum E xh al e in a
. .

p erfe ct way and you n ee d n ot give th o ught t o

the inhaling Control the outgoing brea th
.

th rough th e u s e of the diaphragm ; from the tim e

you begi n to exhale keep the breath even an d
,
228 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

sion s ll owed full s way the brea th c en ter

are a ,

changes from the abdomen to the chest an d the

respi rati on b e comes short and quick in its ac
tion Both m ental and physical temperan c e on
.

any plane o f li fe i s n ec e ssary for pe rf e ct

breathing Th e body c an only be kept pois e d
.

as it is con t roll ed by th e mind As on e s .

’

thought is cent ered the body b ecomes erect an d

, ,

the inne r force is evid enc ed in the outer form .

Wh e n th e t ru e thought habit is e stablish ed it in

tu rn estab l ishes the physical habit Physical ex .

e rcis e o f al l ki n ds such as walki n g running

, , ,

riding e tc a re all good but w e must ne ve r

, .
, ,

los e sight o f th e fact that it is th e m e nt al ex

h ilaration that gi ve s us all tr u e e ff ects : that th e

me re physical act its elf is n ot enough t hat it is ,

the enjoym ent which we get from i t that t e nds

to ren ew and st rength en th e mind and body .

Wh e n any thing don e in th e physical re alm b e

come s monotonou s so that w e lose interest it
, ,

will b ring littl e ben efit to mind or body W e .

must l e a rn to b e thoroughly inte re st ed in ev e ry

thing w e do and then both wo rk and play will
p rov e ben eficial In doing things in th e right
.

way th ere a re always tw o actions— the action

,

f rom th e c ente r ou t and a return or refl ex ac

ti o n p roving the law that whate v er we gi ve o ut
wi ll return to us Rem emb er the re flex ac tion
.

m u st ever be the result of th e true inn er acti on ,

 Th e B reath f
o Life 229

a s th i s alone cau ses m ind and bo dy to act an d

reac t in perfect harm on y .

If we d raw wi th the i nbreath l i fe gi vin g -

prop ertie s from the vegetati on abou t us an d ,

th e vegetati on i n tu rn is benefited by ou r o ut
going breath it tends t o sow th e in te r rel a
,
-

ti ons between man an d the lowe r form s of li fe

that al ll ife i s on e and the t rue re lation con si st s
in a mutual givi n g and receiv i ng which ho l ds
good even from the least to the greatest of
thin gs .

There is a sci enc e in th ough t an d breath

which some day all will wish t o master and
th rough such mastery wi ll man tak e his rightful
pl ac e as th e real lord of c reation I do n ot wis h
.

to be unde rstood as laying undu e stre ss on the

pow e r of b reath asid e from a cont rolled and
,

di re cted e ff ort on th e part of man ; fo r I beli ev e

that physical exe rcise of any kind is o f com
p a ra tivel y litt le ben e fit sav
, e as it b e c o mes a ve

h icl e for t he e xpressi on of inn e r thought and

feel i n g In o rd e r to ge t l asting good from

.

breathing exercises we must pay ma rk e d atten

,

tion to tho se att ribut e s of soul and facu lti e s of

mind that unde r no rma l conditions should al
ways control th e action of b re ath Uplifting .

d e si re cause s us to b reathe strongly and d eeply ,

while weak vacillating d e sir e re s u lts in supe r

,

ficial bre a thing . Con t rol l e d b re ath action has

-
23 0 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

a marked eff ect on the circulation of the bl ood

it is po ssible to regulate an d con trol the ci ren
lation of th e blood through d ire cted breath ac
tion so that it will flow equally to all pa rts of
,

the body sustaining and n ourishing allo rgan s

,

al ik e and n ot only t hi s bu t my own e xperien c e

,

h as als o c on vi n ced me o f the possibili ty o f draw

in g n ouri shm en t f rom the very atmosphere we
breathe To what exten t th is may be ca rried I
.
,

am n ot yet fully prepared to say ; t h e re i s every

thing in the air necess ary to sustain physical

li fe and I s e e n o good o r valid re ason wh y man
should not even tually take all o r at least th e
greater part o f his no urishm en t from th e at
mosph ere about him I n fact all the elemen ts
.

upo n which we now exist in gro s s e r fo rms a re

,

to be found in finer and mo re subtle form in the

atmos phere awaiting o n ly man s appro p ri a ti on
’
,

o f them Age s passed before el e ctri ci ty was

.

con sciously used by man an d yet through all,

man s life he had been bathed in el ectric vibra

’

tion s all uncon scious o f what was taking pl ac e .

I n th e sam e way man h as been bre athi n g in a

,

g re a t d e al of th e nourish m e n t n e ces sa ry t o th e

su staining o f his body but in ign oran ce of what

,

he was doi n g Now through a con sciously di

.

rected e fi o rt th ere sh all come the po w e r to

appropriat e a still large r s upply of the un seen

bread of life which i s all around an d abo u t him ,

232 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

s pirit ( Lati n : spi ritu s spi rare to breathe ) gi ve s

, ,

the thought of breath as the outer correspon d

en c e o f Universal Spirit maki n g all vibra ,

tion depen dent on the breath o f l i fe I n the .

Gospel acco rdin g to St Joh n w e read When.

, ,

he h ad sai d t hi s he brea thed on them an d s aith

,

un to them Recei ve ye the H oly Gho st

, Th e .
’

—
old En glish an d an ci e nt Saxon gas t s ign ifies
breath ; the wo rd h ol o m i
‘

y h as n o ther ea n ng
than that of wh ole an d so we might well read
,

the passage Receive ye the whole breath Th e

, .

rece ivi n g o f the wh ole breath would mean a

tho rough kn owledge as to control an d dire ction
of b re a th. Fo r a number o f ye ars Jesu s had
been i n st ructing his disciples i n the mysteri es o f
life an d we kn ow that he sai d on on e occas i on
,

To yo u it i s given to kn o w o f the mysteri es

o f th e Ki ngd om of Go d an d in t he pa ssa ge
!
,

qu oted the th ought we get i s that the ti me h ad

,

com e when his disciples were ready t o rec eiv e

their last instructi on an d his breathin g upon
th e m would seem to in dicate that they rec e ived
it through other ch an n els th an that of th e
spoken word The re i s an i nner brea th the
.
,

b reath o f th e Spi rit o f Li fe o f whi ch w e in , ,

the Western World kn ow little i f an yth in g

, ,

ei th e r o f its production o r it s real eff ect up on

life What little we do kn ow is that the so ul o f
.

man must b e in consciou s relati on with the Un i

 Th e B reath o f Life 233

ve rs al S oul an d that when this occurs th e new

, ,

b reath comes i nto existen ce an d produces an en

tirel y n e w ac ti o n I t is alm
. o st as th o ugh all
outer b reathing were for the time being sus
pended and what appea rs to be a ro tary acti on in
b rea th movem ent takes plac e di ff erent in a way ,

from th e spi ral motion o f th e ordinary breath .

It s efi ect on the mind is to b rin g gre ater mental

en light en men t I beli eve that it pro duces et er
.

nal vibration which se rves to relate us t o all

,

etheric vibration without The re is an e cstasy .

o f feel i ng coming from this b reath or i t may b e ,

that the e cstasy of feeling such a s faith hop e , , ,

joy l ove s et up the vib ration o f th e inne r

, ,

breath Th e great s ee r E manue l Sw edenbo rg

.
, ,

had kn owle dge o f and re ferred to this breath

in his writings Re cently I re ad th e wo rk of
.

a H indo o wh o lived m o re than four hundre d

years ago in which he tells something of thi s

breath and its uses Sometime we a re going to
.

k n o w th at thi s qu estion of b reath i s a far mo re

in te rio r on e than n ow appears It is noth .

ing mo re n o r l e s s than the breath o f the Uni

vers al Spi ri t that on e m ust inhale and wh en ,

we h ave learn ed to re c e ive th e H ol y Spirit ( the

wh o le breath ) the compl e te life o f love we will
, ,

begin to c onsci ously liv e th e li f e e ternal the—

li fe th at is a s perfect at i ts ci rcumferen ce as at
it s cen ter ; we will vib rate light and love and
2 34 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

joy from thei r sou rce in u s in an un broken s e

,

ries o f radiation s in ha rmon y with both th e in

,

n er an d the o u ter life . We shall start on a n ew

ro und of evo lu ti on wh i ch shall t en d to m ake

every man greater than he h as eve r been in th e

past which shall m ean the developmen t o f
,

greate r po s sibiliti es and powers than he h as ever

eve n dreamed o f i n the presen t .

Th e physical cen t er fo r the spirit ual b rea t h

is at the sol ar plexu s whi ch li e s j u st back o f
,

the stomach ; here is located th e s un cen ter o f

life and from this cen ter a re gen e rated all the
magnetic an d elect ric currents o f li fe M an s .
’

i n n e r feelings gen e rat e magn etic en e rgy ; m an s ’

highest thought s gene rate the el ect ric curren ts

of b eing : these two forces unite an d blend in
on e produci n g pe r fe ct spiri tu al mental and phy s
, ,

ical vibration s They constitute what S wede n

.

bo rg c all s the love an d the wisdom an d it i s ,

through love an d wi sdom that the life of man

b e c ome s perfected Th e heart and the b rai n
.

may b e the two centers from whi ch thes e fo rce s

have th eir flow to all parts of the b ody but the ,

so l ar plexu s i s the foun tain he ad from whi ch

-

th ey d raw thei r supply O f cou rse everything

.

that we call physica l is on ly a co rresponden ce

of that which is invisible an d is n ot to be l ooked
upon as s om ething in an d o f itself Al l th e .

m e chanism an d won d er o f th e physical fo rm

2 36 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

each thought be rei nforced b y true feel in g an d

it will go out a s a mess enger o f good an d b e
c ome a li ving thing in som e othe r mind With .

control of thought and m astery o f breath th ere ,

c ould n ev er be such a stat e as a nervo us dis

order It may be that b reath causes the vibra
.

tion which carri e s ev ery t ru e thought pict ur e -

of life from on e mind to an oth er ; i t may be

God s word that is bre athe d into th e life of man
’

s o tha t the thought o f J e su s breathing on H is

disciple s but symbolize s the gre at cre ati v e

power as tran smitting H is own life an d l ove t o
H is b eloved chi l dren . Th e br eath of the Al
mighty hath gi v en the e life .In thinking h e
m s itiv ell in t he afli rmative ; th ere can b e
n o fai l u re s in l i fe when man lives on the affi rma
ti ve side : only the n e gati v e fail s In the con
.

t ro l o f t hought and b rea th th ere is a posi ti v e

action th ere is a pois ed state of mind an d bo d y
, ,

th ere is fo rce unde r c on trol Th e physi ca l p e r

.

f ection of th e race has n ot yet been atta ined a n d

wi ll not b e unti l man ha s learned to c on trol th e
full force o f his own life .
 S YM PATHETIC TELE PATH Y

Th ere aredi ff eren t kin ds and degrees of

thought vibration Thought s can b e mad e to
.

v ibrat e through the eth er or they may vib rate

,

on ly to the earth s atmosphe re When thought

’
.

i s th e res ul t o f inn er fe eling its vibrati ons a re

ethe ric Wh en thought is th e result o f a false
.

emoti on al condition o f th e mind i t vibrate s t o

the earth s atmosphere E ve ry form on e arth
’
.

i s in a con stan t stat e of vibration E ach form .

may be s aid to hav e its own keynot e which is an ,

ex p re s si on o f the vibrating force within i t .

Vibration proce e ding from an y form at a gi ve n

ra t e will sympath etically relat e its e lf t o al l v ib ra

ti on attuned to it .

Te lepathy is n ow an acc e pte d sci entific fact ,

bu t n o scientific expl anation as yet fully ac

counts f or the fact There have b ee n no law s
.

fo rmulated which defin e the p rincipl e s by which

th o ugh t t ransf e re nc e take s pl ac e It is th e oh.

j cet of thi s chapte r to explain in a definite way

such action and in order to do thi s it wi ll b e n e c
,

essary to en ter mo re or le ss into ce rtain things

, ,

which at first may seem to ha ve littl e or no rela

tion to th e s ub j ect Neve rthel e ss su ch explana
.
,

337
2 38 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

tion is n ecessary to a comprehen siv e gra sp and

a mo r e th orough un de rstan d i ng o f th e ma t ter in

question .

I n the fi rst place l et u s con si der the body of

,

ma n It i s an organ ism th at is con ti n ually bein g

.

act e d upon by man s in ner feelin gs an d h is m ore

’

exte rnal emotions It is an organ i sm that i s

.

b ein g acte d upon by his harmon i ou s thinki ng ,

an d is a s c ertainly acte d upo n by hi s disc orda n t

th ought Wh en inner feeling an d outer thi nk

.

in g a re harmon iously adju s te d t hen the b o dy,

may b e said to b e an i nst rumen t that is vibrati n g

in a rhythmic way to eth e ric vibration Th e bo dy .

i s a musical inst rument o r an orchestra w e

, ,

might say o f musical in st rumen ts for allha ve

, ,

b ee n la rgel y fashioned afte r the body Th e .

b e ating of the h eart the circulati on o f the bl ood

, ,

th e muscula r action o f the body a re allevidenc es

o f th e harmonic vibration s pr oduced when i n n er

feel ing is allowe d full and uninterrupted o u te r

e xpre ssion I f such rhythmic harmon y could b e
.

constan tly maintain ed the body would b ecome

,

as e t e rnal as m ind an d soul but becau se of the

,

introducti on o f false emotion s an d di sco rdan t

thi nkin g th ere is s et up an inharmon ious vib ra
,

ti on which is de structi ve t o all rhythm an d t h is

, ,

i n turn pro duc e s chemi cal chan ge s which res ul t

in po ison ous sub stan ce s destructiv e to th e or
g an is m
.
24 0 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

cen t ration th e vibrati on is s et up in the brain

which will go out an d rea ch th e other mind that
is attuned sympatheti cally to thi s vibration pro ,

d u cin g the s ame kind an d rat e o f vib rati on in

the mind and body of the rec eiv er as that which
wa s originally s et up in the first person .

Te l e pathy then bec ome s a ques tion o f s ym

, ,

path e tic vibration an d in its highest fo rm time

,

and space play n o p art Th ought transferen ce .

-

on a lowe r plan e where the vibrations are purely

,

a tmospheric are not by an y means as far rea ch

,

ing in the ir e ff ec ts Un less they fin d peo ple

.

n e ar at hand attuned to that ki n d an d rate of

v ibration they will produc e no s e riou s disturb
ance and the rea son for this i s th at i n al
, lt rue
thought v ib ration mental con cen trat ion is n ece s
-
,

sary an d no mind can b ecome th oroughly con

,

cen trated in ange r ha te m alic e j ealou sy or re

, , , ,

venge There fore such m essages go out an d

.
, ,
’

b ecome dissipat e d i n the w orld s atmosphere ; ’

o r i f re c ei ve d at all ente r i nt o th e min ds o f

, ,

oth ers wh o to a degree are controlled by the

sam e m ental states There are m any degrees in
.

t ele pathy We are constantly r eceivi ng thought

.

message s from othe r s an d at ti mes it is difficul t

,

to distingu i sh between them an d our own

thoughts .

Peopl e tal k glibly about coin cid en ce s an d ,

o f th in gs happen in g Nothin g ev er happen s ;

.
!
 S ympathetic Tel
ep athy 24 1

everythin g whether great or little is ca used by

, ,

the action o f law We may not un ders tand the

.

law but that i s n o reas on wh y we should den y

,

the eflect Th e un iv e rse i s n ot governed by

.

blind chan ce : law an d o rder reign suprem e .

What appea rs to u s to be disord e r an d lack o f

law c o uld we but discern it ari ght woul d be
, ,

seen to be an ord e rly succession o f even t s .

Ign oran t an d un observant bigoted o r prejudiced

, ,

minds may tak e a di ff eren t vi e w blinding their ,

eye s to the ligh t o f t ruth ; but this in n o way

a fi ects t he fact s which such m in d s are too n ar
,

row to perc ei ve .

We att un e our selve s at it were f or receiv

, ,

in g fro m oth e rs through the quality of our own

th oughts an d d e si res and at tim e s w e b e c o me
,

so cl o s el
y relat e d to oth e r minds that i t w oul d
be next to im po ssible f or u s to tell how m uch
we are in flu enced by th e ir thought s We can .

n ot cu rtail th e though t o f ot her pe ople but each ,

person can determine as to the kind an d th e

quality o f thought he will ha ve come to hi m
from othe r minds I t is h is own thought an d
.

f e elin g which d etermine s thi s Cl ea r positive

.
,

thought p icturing st rong t rue f eeling are the

-
, , ,

means by which we attune ou rselves to the same

kin d an d quality of though t and feeling in
others Our thought and feelin gs i nte rmingle
. ,

as it were be nefiting all concern ed No mat

, .
242 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

ter advers e the ci rcum stan ces m ay b e in

h ow
li fe w e have the po we r within oursel v es t o be
,

come consciously related to other people i n such

a way tha t th eir th o ugh t will gi v e us st ren gt h

to overcome the adverse co nditi ons O r agai n .

,

we may become chann els fo r the weak di seas e d , ,

pove rty st ri cken thought o f the w orl d wh ich

-
,

fl ows from othe r minds in to our own becaus e

of the w rong t ho ught vibra ti on we set u p by
-

fal se imaging in the mind .

Th e d e si re on the pa rt o f man y while i n t ro u

,

bl e for sympathy is o ften a s ource o f weakn e ss

, ,

to them be cause usually it serves on ly to relat e

,

th em to th e troub le d and so rrowful minde d in

a way that is far from helpful A t rue s ym
.

path y i s always that whi ch uplifts n ot only the ,

re ce iver but also th e gi ver There i s much

, .
,

how ever in so call e d sympath y that i s fal se an d

.

-
,

d e p ressing On e in so r row or in t ro ubl e in

.
,

ste ad o f finding his bu rden e asier to bea r b e

caus e o f the sympathy he recei ves fin ds that ,

his li f e take s on a darker aspect and hi s min d ,

is not only abso rbe d with h i s own gloomy d e

s pon den t thought but with th e gl oomy d e sp ond
,

ent thoughts of others that are b eing constantly

di rect ed to him b e caus e o f hi s fanci e d n e ed of
sympathy What we image i n the mi n d s ooner
.

o r l ate r w e e xp re ss I f we are recei ving from

.

othe rs tho ughts that are detrim en tal to our well

244 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

wh o con sciously uses telepathy to inju re another

per son is doing himsel f a gre ate r injury b e
, ,

cause his wrong thought n ee d not nec e ssarily

be received by th e on e he sends it to bu t the ,

on e wh o t ransmits the w r ong m es sage cannot

separat e h is mind from wha t h e has thought .

We are constantly reaping t h e fruit of ou r own

thoughts Th e use o f t elepathy may be mad e
.

th e means o f accomplishing untold good or may ,

become a two e dge d swo rd that cuts b oth ways

-
.

In the transmission of thought if the imag ,

in g faculty i s high ly d ev elop ed th e re will b e ,

clear c oncise thought picture s We cann ot ex

,
-
.

peet to transmit a mes sage to anothe r mi nd ,

when th e message is not clea rly de fin ed in our

own Again th e mind must be com e thoroughly
.
,

cent e red fo r through such focusing the will

,

acts as a proj ecting e n ergy p roducing th e n ece s

sa ry vibration If on e is lacking in conc entra
.

tion he cannot exp ect to be su cc essful in thought

tran sferenc e b e caus e the whol e fo rce of will
,

and thought b ecom e s dissipat ed an d p roduc e s ,

no persist e nt vibration Th e thought pictu re is

.
-

th e fram ewo rk ; it is energy that make s it po

tent I f on e h as constructed in mind a beau ti
.

ful tho ught pictu re which he wou l d lik e to t rans

-

mi t to another mind he mu s t feel all tha t he

has thought In other words the picture he h as
.
,

thought o ut must be real to him ; i t must be a

 S ymp athetic Tel
ep athy 24 5

true expression of him self in order that it may

b eco me a clea r though t pictu re in the mind o f
-

the on e rec e iving I f th e mind is focused then

—
.
,

y o u can di re c t your message yo u ca n s end i t

whe re you will to send it .It may enter into
an oth e r mind ben efiting and upli f ting that
,

m ind ; o r th e mind may refuse to acc ept it an d

d erive n o ben efit becaus e although re ce ivi ng on e
, ,

n eed not acc e pt tho ught from another to en ter

ta in for hims el f it is Optional on th e part o f th e

rec ei v er A distinction should b e mad e b etween
.

hypnotism and t el epathy There is nothing o f

.

a hypnotic ord e r in sympath etic tele pathy . Th e

wi l l is u sed fo r the transmission of thought but ,

is not us ed in comp ellin g another mind to do o r

n ot to do . A thought m e ssage m ay b e us e d sug
g e s tin g or ad v ising anoth er bu
, t th e l in e must b e
clea rly d rawn to leave th e one re cei v ing it per
f ectl y fr e e t o act or to re f u s e t o act upon th e a d
v ice N0on e has a right to assume the res pon
.

s ib il ity of willing This is som e thing I will yo u

.

to do and you cannot do othe rwise than do it

, ,

be caus e I am th e st ronge r .On e wh o uses

!

thought in this way must unde rstand that such

th ought will re act t o p roduce inj u ry to the on e
sen ding it out .

O n e may s ee th e e ff e c t of what i s c alled the

—
h ypn oti c t re atm e nt th e willing of another per
s on to d o o r th e subj e ction of on e mind t o an
, ,
246 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

other s wil
’
—
l th at th is i s condition of men tal
a

sl avery an d while at fir st th ere ma y be te mpo

,

ra ry goo d resul ts the aft er e ff ect s are j us t as

,
-

pern icious as an y deadly poison taken i nto the

s yst em to tem po rarily rel i eve s u ff e ri n g When .

ever we t ry to restrict another s though t o r ac

’

tion it i s an efi ort upon ou r part t o restrict the

un iv ersal will in i ts full and free exp re s si on in
in di vidual life We set up an action wh ich
.

l ater on proves det ri m ental to u s as well as to

the other or othe rs who may hav e come unde r
its i nfluen ce We might as wel l und erstan d at
.

once that n o individual h as the ri ght to sub j ect

an ot her mind to his will ; t ha t e v ery pe r son

should be left free to accept or rej e ct ; th at com

pulsion should never be re sort ed to und er an y
pre text what soever for the subj ect cannot b e
,

benefited in any way by such a rbitra ry action .

Th e f ree untramme l e d l ife can only remain free

,

and untramme led by allowing to eve ryone the

sa me f ree dom i t e njoy s its el f E ach so ul ha s a
.

sepa rat e an d individual plan t o work out an d ,

n o oth er b e ing can express i t for hi m .

Charcot says that the psychic charac teristic

o f hypnotic somnambulism is one o f absolute
—
t rust a boundl e ss confidence on the part o f the
subj e ct toward the one that has hypn oti zed him .

No matter ho w improbabl e th e story told in the

pre s ence o f a person so hypn oti zed he b el i eves
,
248 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

tion the good th at is alleged to fl ow from it s

use . I f we sac rifice our own indepen den c e our ,

own i nd i vidu ali ty has n ot the p rice been grea t er

,

than an y seemin g gain that m ay come to u s

through the overcomin g o f pain When we are
in ha rmony wi th th e law s o f Nature we d o n ot,

in duce reaction s ; but we realize that a perfect ,

regul ate d acti on b ec omes n ec e ss ary fo r ei the r

mental or physical health .

O n e so ul highly developed m en tally con t em

, ,

plating anothe r soul on ly physi cally devel oped ,

mi ght think th at ii such a person would adopt

h is plan o f life the ben efit an d use of th at pe r
s on s li fe mi gh t be en han c ed Su ch an ad0p
’
.

tion ho wev e r wo uld on ly hi n de r the one l i vi n g

, ,

upon th e phy sical plan e Th ere is a n a tural

.

o rde r in the developmen t of th e life o f man and ,

th e physical plane is as n ecessary to that de

vel opmen t a s th e highes t s piritual pl an e All .

pl anes are but degre e s of growth The re is an

.

ever asc ending s cal e in li fe but e ach step i s n ec

,

e s sa ry to the pe r fe ct developme nt o f the wh ol e .

Th e pe rs on wh o has been abl e to c on sci o u sly

real iz e h i s on en e ss with al l life and wh o in
, ,

s ymp athy o f mi n d and d e s i re re l at e s himse lf to

,

the great body of human ity can more tho r,

oughly demon strate the use an d tru th o f telep

athy than could anyone el se wh o has n ot n u
f olded to such consciousn ess It is God s pl an ’
.
 S ympath etic Tel
ep athy 249

th at peopl e a re n ot able to u se the hi gher pow

e rs un til th ey learn h ow to use them for goo d ,

so tha t while there are people in the wo rld wh o

are usi n g po w e r fo r s e lfish en ds an d p u rpose s ,

y e,t bec a u se o f the lack of cl e a rn e ss and p er

ception wh ich comes on l y th rough the inn er con

s ciou s n es s th ey a re unabl e to use i t in the s ame

,

e fi ective way i n which a mo re highly d eve lope d

per s on could To be succ e ssful in th e t ransmi s

.

si on o f thought to many di ff e rent minds one ,

mu s t ha ve a la rge und erstan ding of human n a

tu re an d a sympath etic d e si re to b e com e tho r
,

oughly h elpful to tho se he is d e si ring t o im

p re ss No matt e r to how high a degre e of de
.

vel opmen t one may h ave att ai n ed i t is possibl e

,

f or him to enter into sympath etic r elation with

people on eve ry octav e bel ow him in the scale
o f bei n g . This can be acc omplish e d through ,

and only through th e Spirit of Love We are

, .

n ot dragged d own th rough ass ociatio n w i th peo

pl e on low e r planes of l i fe but w e exe rt an u p

,

li fti ng i n fluence upon them Jesus was a .

frien d o f ha rlots publicans and sinne rs but H is

, ,

life wa s in n o way contaminat ed by these people

w ith whom H e cam e in contact We kn ow that .

H e exe rt e d a gre ater influ e nc e upo n th e ir live s

th an H e was abl e to do upon the lives of either
Scrib e or Pharisee o f H is day .

Th e i ndi vidual in rel ati ng h i mse lf to the cos

,
25 0 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

mic con sciou sn ess lose s n on e o f his own i den

,

ti ty bec ome s non e the less indi vi du al

, Th e .

more uni ve rsal one grows the more indivi dual

iz ed he becomes Th e re is always a great truth
.

to be found at the bottom of things that on the

mo re uni ve r sal one g rows the mo re indivi dual
,

an d socialism Yo u will s ay that they a re as f ar

.

apart a s two conditi ons can possibly be that they ,

hav e abs olutely no point o f conta ct Indi v idu .

al ism mean s that e ve rything becom e s s ubo rdi

n at e t o the welfa re o f the indi v idual without re ,

gard to th e great body of hu manity ; socialism

means that one buri es his indi v id u al life in car
ing an d doing f or humanity as a whole .

Whe reas the fact is that individu al life has to

,

be tho rou ghly realiz ed to be come fully kn o wn

,

and u nd erstood be fore the re can come any con

,

s ciousn es s of the uni versal life Wh en the .

tru ly indi vidualized li f e reaches such a con

s ciou s n es s it lat e r be co m e s s o afli l
iated with the
la rger consciou sness as to be abl e on ly to ex
p re ss its el f f or the social good .

Th rough the u s e of submarine cables th e tele ,

graph wi rele ss te legraph t elephone m ov ing

, , ,

pictu re s exp ress t rains and fast steamshi ps

,

— th rough th e se oute r m e ans w e have b een

b rought i n to closer contact with all hu man
ity on th e face of th e gl obe Through such
con tact we are coming l ittl e by l ittle to se e ,
25 2 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

B u t wh at pa rti cul ar use would th i s be som e ,

may inqu ire What ad vantages would i t pos

.

se s s over speech ! Th e same if not greater ad

, ,

vantages ,
tha t the telephone possesses as a
means of communication over a l etter Th e di .

rectl y p er so n al fee l ing on e has in speaki n g t o

some one over the telephone i s not felt to the
same degree in the case o f th e written message .

S o would it be with telepa th y on ly the sym pa

,

th e tic rela ti on ship felt between the minds wou ld

be greater than that produced by the telephone .

Tel epathy helps man t o realize h i s onen ess with

his fell owmen and shows him that ti me and
,

space o ff er no real obsta cle to the comm un i on

of one soul with another .

At the p re s ent time po sitiv e m in de d an d to a

-
,

degree n egati ve mind ed peopl e rec ei ve a great

-
,

many thou ghts f rom others which they think

a re products of th e i r own minds They a re
.

oft en gre atly disturbe d by thes e thoughts wh en ,

as is som eti mes the case they are in harmonious

,

an d ev il in natu re , bu t wh en peopl e com e to

kn ow and appre ciat e the truth of telepathy they
wi ll see the necessity of maki ng their minds
po si ti ve against all such wrong thinki ng and ,

an element of disturbance wil l b e removed from

their sphere o f life Th ere are a great man y
.

advan tages to be derived th rough a kn owledge

of telepathy an d the way in which to shu t o ut
,
 S ympathetic Tel
epathy 25 3

f rom ou r min ds th os e th ou gh ts of oth er peopl e

wh i ch we ha ve n o desi re to retain .

E very sen s itive con dition is a sou rce of weak

n e ss to th e in dividua lun tilh e un ders tan ds h ow

to con vert i t in to an el em en t o f powe r Th e

.

sen s i tiv e con di tion ma k es on e con sci ous when

an gry or ma lici ous tho ughts a re d i re cted agai nst

him, an d th us he may be put on h is gua rd so

th at it i s l mn eces s a ry that he sho uld be a flected
b y th em Th i s sen siti v e condi tion ma kes i t pos
.

sible for u s to distin gu i sh be tween our fri ends

an d th os e peo ple wh o may en t e rtain enmi ty
again s t us . It gives u s an in sight into life an d
chara ct er that woul d be difficult to obta in th rough
an y oth er mean s . Th erefo re, wha t s eems to be
a we akn es s may be t ran smut e d into a s o u rc e o f

p o wer . S en si ti v en e ss , when not understo o d an d

a pp reciat ed appea rs to be w eaknes s in that it
, ,

make s one s ubj ect to al lkinds of attacks an d ,

on e s uflers greatly th ro ugh it ; bu t once we

make our minds positi v e to the good and the

t rue then sensi tiveness i s the something that
,

p rotect s us from many dan ge rs O n e should .

n ot try t o become less s ensit i v e than he is bu t ,

should try rather to un de rstand the true m e an

in g of sensitiveness an d th rough such kn owl
,

edge deri ve no t on ly s t ren gth an d po wer bu t

in crea s e d happin e ss .

In numberless ways then we fin d that s ym

, ,
254 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

pa theti c tel ep athy wi ll prove o f ben efit an d that

,

th ro ugh c onsci ou sly di rected eff o rt wil l c o me

still greater dev el opment un til by an d by
, ,

th rough its use we will kn ow an d understand

,

people o f all n ati on alities as we have n eve r

kn own them before We see that through s uch
.

kn owledge will come a closer relation ship that

will produce a mo re f ratern al spirit the wo rl d
over , be caus e wh en people unde rstan d ea ch
other they ha ve a truer a ppreci ati on o f r eal va l
u e s tha n e ver befo re .

Telepathy is th e devel opmen t o f a n ew an d a

higher sens e in the life o f man With ea ch
.

stage of developmen t man enters into a larg er ,

fu l ler life an d the refo re in to a greater joy an d

, , ,

happin ess in l i vin g

.
25 6 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

di sc ordan t noise s an d this n ot becau se there i s

, ,

anything th e m atter wi th th e p i an o or a n ything ,

e vil in th e person It is only that he does n ot

.

und er stand the relation ship of th e various keys

o f the in s trum en t ; in other w o rd s h i s theo ri es , ,

i f he ha s an y have n e ver been made prac tical

, ,

an d s o he lose s all s en s e of pr opo rtio n an d with ,

i t allharmon y o f soun d .

Th e illustration o f the p i ano m ust be a ppl i ed

to hum an life We a re apt to say o f peopl e wh o
.

a re attuned or adjusted to life that they a re ,

goo d people and on the oth er hand we are a s

, ,

prone to s ay o f tho se n ot adju sted to life th at ,

th ey are b ad or ev illy dispo sed Bu t wha t we

, .

ca ll good o r evil i s after al ,

l ha rmon ious a d
,

j ustm e nt o r th e lack of i t O n e not kn owing

, .

the laws o f l i fe an d their application i s in e x ,

a ctly the sa m e p o siti on a s t he on e having n o

kn owledge of mu si c or of harmony an d con s e ,

quently n o power o f true expressi on an d as a ,

resul t only expressing the discord of li fe .

No matte r how s t rong our bodi e s a re i f we ,

hav e n o kn owledge of the laws of l i fe they wil l

after a tim e become disease d o r out of t un e , .

E v en a t ra i n ed musi cian s i n st ru ment will

’

th rough u s e become out o f tune But hi s acute .

e ar tel l s him thi s and his trai ned m ind en abl es

,

him t o tune hi s instrumen t so it will con ti n ue

to produce harmon y of soun d .
 Attun ed to Life 25 7

O ur bodi es may be perfectly well ; they may

be p er fe ct ly stron g ; an d y et we may not be using
th e m in such a way as t o p r oduce ha rm ony in
life Th e p er son with no kn owl e dge of music
.

will soon by its abuse instead of its use get a

, ,

highly tun e d piano out o f tune and it is mo r e

-
,

than probabl e that a pe rson w ithout kn owledge

will a llow som e part o f th e human organism t o
become too st rained or relaxe d so that these ,

pa rts a re no longer i n tune with the re st o f th e

body If he w er e possessed of kn owl edge it
.
,

would n ot tak e him long to pe rc e i ve thi s and ,

to s et hims elf to w ork to ov ercome the w rong

conditions .

When w e listen to musi c we kn ow that the

,

inst rum ent in and of itsel f is pow erless to p ro

duc e it that the pl aye r dire cts and that back
—
,

of the di re ction and th e music li e s the ve ry so ul

,

o f music itself An d s o it is with the in stru

.

m ents which we cal l ou r bodi e s O u r minds .

act and dire ct them wis ely o r unwis ely accord ,

ing t o ou r kn owl e dge of life but back of our

,

bodies back of our minds lies th e ve ry soul of

, ,

life its elf W e may understand a great de al

.

about th e te chniqu e of m u sic that is the pu rely

— ,

mental pa rt ; w e may also unde rstand a great

deal a bou t the te chnique o f mind ; which is in ,

its turn also p urel y mental ; but when a p erson

,

who has only d eveloped the techni que of m u sic

25 8 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

sits down to play instead of getting beautiful

, ,

soul sati sfying music th e listener feels a lack

-
,

miss e s something in the music and w onde rs ,

what it is It is simply that the soul has n ot

.

ent ered into it the musician has only thought

—
,

not fe lt th e re f o re he is unable to express musi c

, ,

in its highest f o rm .

What holds good in music is equa lly tru e ,

concern ing ou r minds and ou r bodi es I f th e .

mind is not in communion with th e One L i fe ,

th en th ere can not b e be autiful soul satisfying ,

-

exp ression th roughou t the mind or th e bo dy .

B ecaus e t o be attu ned to l i fe th e mind must b e

, ,

in intimate relation wi th th e soul th e mind mus t ,

com e in v ita l contact with th e consciou sn e ss o f

feeling . Without consciousne ss of feeling ,

th ere can b e n o c re ati v e wo rk in any departm e nt

o f life . No matter how wond er f ul th e mind
may be in its te chniqu e of thinking th ere wil l ,

always b e lack of t rue exp ression .

To put it in anoth er way a wo rkman m i gh t ,

be equippe d with al l th e pl ans and wi th a ll th e

too ls and the nec e ssa ry knowl edge to const r uc t
an artistic bui l ding but without th e material s
,

n e c e ssary fo r such a building it would only b e ,

a castle in th e air Th e re al material out o f

.

wh i ch cha ract er c re ative wo rk and e ve rything

,

else in fact is built is feeling f a r more than

, , , ,

thinking .
260 A New H eaven an d a New E a rth

si de of ourselve s To b e attun ed to life we

.
,

mu st go t o th e sou rce of li f e its elf and make ,

li fe i t s own interp rete r We may n Ot depend on

.

the i n terpret ation anyone else may or can gi v e

to life n or o n an y book no r an y cree d nor an y
, ,

thing el s e Th e interpretati on o f life must al

.

ways b e i n what we ou rs elve s are abl e to feel

o f life . This in no way interfe re s wi th our lis
t eni n g to oth er s th oughts or Opi nions concern
’

ing li fe o r re ading and t hi n king abou t th e

,

kn owledge an d wisdom acqui red by oth ers an d

expres s ed by th e m through s poke n o r writt en
wo rd . It m eans however that i n the l a st
, ,

analy si s we m ust consult the God within ou r

,

s el ves an d ob ey only the di ctates of Universal

,

Consci ou sne s s .

Let u s t urn f rom th e considera tion of fe eli n g ,

to the pha s e of life whe re we thi n k an d reas on

ab o u t th i ngs w e ha ve f el t We all kn ow that .

there are times wh en thought reason an d ,

spoken word a re all inadequate to express ou r

fe elings Th e mind is cont inually through l
. it ,

tl e or much e ff ort t rying to express th is i n n e r

,

consciou s ne ss If we feel but a little w e ex

.
,

p ress but a littl e and i f we feel much we are

, ,

able to ex pres s much In expressi on too come s

.
, ,

the proper attunement to li f e Th e mind h as .

m an y faculties and wh en all are rightly re

,

lated to each othe r these faculti es act in h ar

,
 A ttn n ed to Life 26 1

mon iou s unison in gi ving ful l and f re e ex

,

pression t o ou r fe el ings .

Th e gre at e s t o f thes e faculti e s is th e one tha t

pictu res or images the thoughts that pass
th r ough the mind E ach thought is really a
.

pict ure in it se l f and i t is th e s u m of all ou r

,

thought s that makes Life s gr e at pictu re com

’

p l
et e o r incomp le te T hought
. pic t u r es in-
o r de r ,

t o be vital must be inspi re d f rom within

, .

Thought is n ot a pow e r in an d of itself ; it is

rath er that which give s shape and form .

Th oughts l imit en ergy to s ome pa rticula r wor k

O r works Thus when we feel and think we
.
,

exp re ss outward ly ; yet it is possibl e to do a

gre at de al of thinking and ve ry l itt le expressing .

Th e fo rce in e xpre ssion is t he e ne rgy that li e s

back o f the thought It is c l ear thinking clear
.
,

mental vision that gi ve s u s per fect f o rm

,

th rough wh i ch ene rgy finds its perfect exp re s

sion .

So in all of ou r w ork we find that be ing ar

tun ed to li f e is a nec e ssary condition Th e mind .

must b e inspi re d by hope and b ecaus e of what

,

we ha v e b ee n able to do and to e xpre ss in th e

past we should hav e hope that w e shall b e abl e
,

to p erform ev en g re at er things in th e futu re .

It is thu s that w e bring abo u t p er fe ction in do

i ng There fore the mind should be filled with
.

hope s hould ne ver doubt o r de spai r

, .
26 2 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

H opeful n e ss is on e elemen t i n h armon iou s

adjus tm en t. Th e min d , too, in it s i d ea ls s hould

be in spi red by faith We should hav e faith in
.

the people with wh om we come in cont act We .

should trust in th em an d this trust will inspire

,

u s to greater faith and will help call these quali

,

t i e s into being in th e li ve s of othe rs ; for that

which we hold in mind for othe rs is that which
in some d egr ee they wi ll re cei ve fr om us .

An d th e re is as much if not mo re const an t

, ,

interchange o f thought or tel e pathy going on

am on g people as there i s o f spoken word .

The r e is no qu e stion but that thought tr ans

mitted f rom one mind to anoth er often p ro v e s
more e ff ectu al than the transmission of th e
spoken or w ritte n w ord If w e have in mind a
.

high and noble ide al of any pe rson with whom

we are associate d he is going t o re cei v e f rom
,

us to a greater o r a l e ss er deg re e o ur thou ght

, ,

concerning him I t is going to make it much

.

easier fo r him t o achieve h is ide al Fu rth er .

mo re in doing this the ide al we hold fo r h im

, ,

be comes a li ving thing in ou r own li ve s What .

we hav e i ns pi red in h im wi ll b e com e pa r t o f

our own inh e ritanc e An d n ot onl y is this t ru e
.
,

but other peopl e will b e giving back t o us in

th e s ame kind a s we hav e been gi ving an d in , ,

p r oportion as we a re doing f or others w e are ,

as truly helping ou r s elves It i s impossible t o

.
264 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

ou r own doi ng Th e tho ught i s this : that e a ch

.

l i fe mus t attun e i tsel f to allthe rest of life and ,

n ot s o much t hr ough pay i n g attentio n to ex

tern al things a s by adju s ting th e mind t o th e

i n n er self tha t the outer s elf may expres s per
,

f ectly w h a t we ar e in re ali t y .

At th e soul cen ter we are altogeth er har

mon ious we are at on e o r attun e d to the Uni
, ,

ver sal Soul It is only in our outer appl i cat ion

.

that we fail Just a s a fin e musician may at

.

times m ak e mistak es in striking the wr on g keys ,

so we make mistake s in striking the w rong k eys

of life But although we do this it is not n eces
.
,

sa ry to make much of it nor to dwell on it , .

It i s far be tte r to rememb e r that the n ext time

we can st rik e the right key and get a p er f e c t
tone We nee d then to persevere in ou r wo rk
.
, , ,

becaus e it i s th rough ke e ping at anything that

we a t las t succe e d i n doing i t wel l We a r e .

liable t o make many and grievous mistakes at

fi rs t but ea ch time should show us a bette r way
,

o f doing an d by and b y we a v oid mist akes and

,
- -
,

eventually bring out the p e rfect harm on y O f l i fe ,

wherei n th e part becomes a s perfect as the

whole .

With perseveran c e we n eed patienc e As a .

gen eral thing we are not pati en t e nough I d o .

n ot me an the pati en ce tha t caus e s one t o s it

an d fo l d his hands and be satisfi e d in doing

 Attun ed to Life 26 5

n othing ; but the patien ce that is n ecessary to ,

th e wo rking out o f any c omplex problem In .

do in g an y work i t is n ot always po ssible to gai n

,

much at first Sometimes we hav e to w ait for

.

the accomplishment of a certai n end an d we ,

sh o uld be patient in the waiting There i s per .

ha ps n o other virtue i n whi ch people are s o

sadly deficient as in patience .

O n e wh o l e arn s the l e sson that pati en ce has

to t each is bet t e r equipp e d for life
, Som etim e s.

we allow the emotional life to so act on our

minds that it is impossible t o s e e anythi ng in its
'

tru e light When ev er we allow ange r hate

. , ,

en v y malice jealousy pride or i rritability to

, , ,

domi n ate th e mind all our attun e m ent to li f e is

,

gone Th e mind is not only ou t of adjustm ent

.

t o its inn e r lif e but out of adj u stm ent to e very

,

thing and ev e ry person in the world in which

we li v e On e n ee d not think for a single minut e
.

tha t he can indulge in the false emotional life ,

and be tho roughly happy an d v igo rously st rong ;

such a thing is impossible DO not mis u n der.

stand me I d o not mean that th ere should be

.

n o happiness or j oy in the ext ernal li f e b ut that ,

the greatest pl easure o r happin e ss o f li f e com es

—
f rom th e j oy of lif e its elf the inn e r happiness
which resul ts in doing and creating in the world .

Ve ry often the temporary pl easure s on the s u r

fac e of life result in pain Th e s u perficial side
.
266 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

of life n o matter h ow i t may exci te to mom en

,

ta ry pleasure is in i t s reaction us ually follow e d

, ,

by m ental angu ish or physical pain ; the les son or

experi e nce on e gets being the only gain , .

Our gr eatest enemies in life are th e un re al

emo tions I ha v e j ust en u m e rated Th e y a r e the .

ta res and thistles that grow side by side with the

wheat But l . et us remember that their exis t

en ce is limited an d that j ust as soo n as s trong

,

d e si re enters one s m ind t o ove rcom e them th e

’
,

first right st ep has been taken They cannot .

continue to li v e if we choo se to use o u r powe r

to overcome th em Light must ev er overcom e
.

darkn es s be that darkn ess mental or physica l

,
.

Al l our eff ort should be direct e d from li f e s

’

cente r t o its circumf erence This alone gi ve s .

p e rfe ct adj ustm en t This will make life a thing

.

of beauty bringing in it s train perfe ct h ealth

,

and happiness This i s wo rking f rom o ne s

.
’

“
highest impu lse and gi v e s shap e to both ou r
,

w ords and deeds When we w ork from the .

c enter or th e I i n us we must of necessi ty ,

come i n touch with th e circumfe rence of every

thing W e are always t ouching th e gre at outer
.

life b ecause of our knowledge of th e inner li fe

,
.

W e are always helping to make li f e harmon i

ou s because of our inn e r kn owl e dge and und e r
,

standing of its requirem e nts W e are also mak .

ing it ea s ier for other people to li ve ha rmoniou s

268 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

i ng makes i t s o that Allthings are good ,

but to h im wh o th in keth a th ing to be evi l to ,

hi m it i s evi l .
!

If man i s in perfect intercours e wi th hi s soul

consciousnes s then everything becomes goo d
,
.

G od is Al lin Al
-
lboth within and with out Th e
-
, .

individual man b ecom es one con sciously with

the Un iversal Spi ri t an d faith love hope joy , , , ,

intelligence health stren gth an d happines s

, ,

radiat e from the cent e r as t ruly as light an d ,

heat radiate from the sun These qualities con .

s titu te the subst ance of all beauty and s ym

m etry Of form in the world of expression and ,

w e po ssessed of them becom e creators of t he

, ,

wo rld in which we li v e .

When we a re attuned to life we li ve i n a c ,

cordan ce with the law Of lo v e and goo d will ;

we have faith in ou r own and othe r peopl e s ’

ideals ; we a re j oyous and happy an d we kno w ,

that eve rything is wo rking toge ther for our

good and n ot alone fo r our good bu t for t he
, ,

gre ater good th e good of all

— All man s
’

thought pictures of life are things of b e auty and

-
,

n o matter in what d e pa rtment of life we li v e ,

e veryth ing li ve s and grows with us This i s .

being attuned to life We mak e life j ust what

.

we will to make it ; th rough conscious kn owledge

an d wisdom an d their application we can make
, ,

our lives j us t as stron g j u st as healthy an d j us t

,
 A ttun ed to Life 269

as h appy as we our selves ch oo se to make

them .

When the inn er and outer man become s at

t un ed then he is truly related to the gran d body
,

O f hu ma ni ty an d als o a t on e with the Universal

,

Will and forms a pa rt o f that grand symph onic

,

harmon y the m usi c o f the spheres which man

, ,

h a s dream ed abo ut bu t h as n ot yet be en abl e to

,

hear or expres s .
 ! VII I
THE TRE E OF L IFE

In th e mid s t of it, an d on ei th er s i e of
th e s treet o f d
h
th e ri ver, wa s t ere th e tree of l if e, w ic bare twelve h h
man n er of f ru its an d y i el
, ded h er f ru i t every mon t h
an d th e l eave s o f th e tre es we re f o r th e in g of th e
ea l h
i
n at on s .

—R evel
a tion , 22 n d Chop , . an d vers e.

M an stands uniqu e and alone in a wo rld i n

which he comp reh e nds within himself the my s
terie s Of the uni ver se Th e riddle of life is n ot
.

t o be found in natu re b ut in man s own life ,

’
.

Th ere a r e no p robl e ms witho u t E v ery p roblem .

that p re sents its e lf fo r sol ution is to be fou nd in

the li f e of man Solv e the inner problem an d
.
,

th e out er becomes re veal ed .

Th e body of man has a greater w onder o f

a rchitectu re in it than man has ever be en able t o
expre ss in any building wrought out by his own
mind and hands Th e body contain s within it
.

self e ve ry mystery and ev e ry wonder that i s to

b e found in the physical uni ver se and yet th e ,

body only symboliz e s in a most imperfect way

the man who liv es in it What you may say of .

th e habitation you may s ay a th ou sa nd tith es

,

o ve r of the occupant .
 7
2 2 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

have been taught in the past that the B oo k Of

Revelati on was a sealed book It is a seal e d
.

b ook in the sense that the mind of man i s n ot

y e t able to i nterpret it but the s e al can be broken
,

when on e approach e s i t an d in t erprets by the aid

o f the spi rit that which is within man s own
,
’

c on s ciousn e ss Th e w riter of th e book say s tha t

.

he wa s in the spiri t when the revelations ca me

to h im Th e spi ri t o f the thin gs o f li fe m u st
.

b e dis cern ed by the spi rit .

It was nec e s sa ry for man to live h i s o ut er

li fe from hi s Alpha to the Omega in order that
, ,

he might see an d kn ow that there was n ei ther

h ealth n or h appines s to be fo und in it ; an d it
will be j u st as nec e ssary when he enter s into th e
realm o f spirit for him to live on e octave afte r
an oth er Of the life that is etern al M an in t h e
.
,

eating of th e frui t of t he t ree of kn owl edge has

located al l life kn owl edge and powe r in th e
, ,

form o f things outside hims elf Th rough his .

partaking of the l ea v es O f th e tree of life there

comes the con sciousnes s of Omnisci enc e Omn i ,

presence an d O mnipotenc e in his own life Th e

, .

Uni v ers al Will expre sses itself through him b e ,

coming manifes t in all fo rms of li f e without ;

th e microc osm becoming the M acroc osm ; man
becoming God There i s n o power outsi de th e
.

li fe Of man there is n o i ntelligence outsi de th e

,

li fe o f man that will deliver h im from hi s law

,
 Th e Tree f
o Lif e 273

of s i n an d death H is tre e of kn owledge o f

.

g oo d an d e vil is al lo f hi s own making If he .

has writte n into his book o f life things which

a re fals e and untru e no one can c or rec t his mis
,

takes sa v e himself If h is mind has imagined

.

that which in reality n ever existed and he ha s ,

b e en e xpre ssing such unreali ti e s in physical

fo rm t h e n he alone has the power t o ov e rcome
,

it. If h e h as written dise ase and d eath i f h e

has writte n s in disco rd an d unrest i n to h rs s ub
,

conscious mind s o that for age s he h as gon e on

,

expres sing them th en h e and h e alone can

, , ,

wri t e a n e w book fill e d with th e et ernal veri

,

ti e s O f li f e The re i s n o mistak e which he has

.

ev er mad e in th e past but that wh en he sees it

and d e si re s to overcome i t h e is on the righ t
,

road to accomplish such ove rcoming a n d ,

through th e overcoming h e attains the mastery .

Y e s man is laying hold on the fruit of th e

,

t re e of li f e and h e wi ll eat of th e l e av es a n d
,

li ve foreve r Al . lh is study of nature in the pa st

was of help and ben efit to him in expanding h is
mind unti l h e was abl e to tak e up the grea t er
,

study of his own life H e re a lize s now as n e ver

.

b e for e that l i f e must be its own inte rp r et e r

,

tha t he must d e a l with his own tho u ghts with ,

h is own f eel ing and actions and that through ,

them h e wi ll b e able to solve every problem th at

con f ron t s him in life .
274 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

I f we could on ly hear in min d that the body of

man symboliz es our own sol ar syst em an d tha t ,

our sola r system is a c ounterpart of many o ther

solar systems allresponding to Univers al Will
an d l aw M an s mi n d is th e moon of hi s body
’
. .

Al lits t h ought pictu re s are i maged ; it is a t e

-

flector n ot a giv er o f l igh t

, Th e moon sh ows .

only on e side t o u s I n the b rain which is th e

.
,

min d s chi ef in strum en t only one l obe is fully

’
,

d eveloped Th e solar plexus co rresponds to th e

.

s un and from thi s sun is radi ated allthe energy

,

of life Th e difi eren t faculti es o f mind a re

.

stars Th e golden candlesti cks rep res en t th e a t

.

tri bute s O i th e soul .

In the Old Test amen t we ha ve th e n am e s o f

the twelve son s of Jacob Th e Hebrew root .

f or ea ch n ame denotes on e of ea ch o f these

twelv e quali ties We fin d that the twelv e tribes
.

o f Israel followed this out in th e taking up o f

—
di ff eren t oc cupations as on e the church ; on e , ,

the law on e merchandise etc That Jes us in

, , ,
.
,

the selection of h is tw el ve apo stles carri ed ou t

thi s s ame though t Th e study O f the chara c
.

ter of each sh ow s that n o two of th em were alike

in disposition Th e Tree o f Life which i s to
.

bear the twelv e mann e r of fruits s rgn ifies again ,

the twelve great quali ties o f min d and we fin d ,

in th e ancient thought of a st rology that th e t ree

—
yielded its frui t every mon th in other wo rds ,
276 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

H eav en at death and w e re eve r a fter to e nj oy

,

i ts ete rnal glo ri e s But the city of God th e

.
,

New J e rusal em ( with its tw elv e gates ) th at ha s

,

n o need of th e ligh t of the sun o r moon or stars ,

b eca use God gi veth it light is within the soul ,

o f man ; is the angel or the pe r fect man ; is th e

Ch ri st or the glo rified man
, In the past man
.

meted out to hims elf all his punishm ents ; in

th e future man wi l l mete out to himsel f his
own rewa rds Th e t ree of life is within h i s
.

own consciousness ; it s growth is de penden t

upon his own eff orts Th e f ruit which th e tree
.

is to yield e ach month wi ll be th e developm e nt

of ea ch facu lty of mind so that the mind will ,

become as pe r f e ct a s the spiri t Wh en we con .

s ciou s ly k n ow that a l l e xte rnal things a r e sub

j ce t t o it ; that i t can no longer d raw its in
spi ration f rom without but m u st d raw it fr om
,

within then th e s ee ing and knowing will ceas e

,

t o be pa rtial Unity and onen e ss will be evi

.

den ced as cl e a rly without as th rough hi s con

s ciou s nes s h e p er c ei ve s it within .

I wi sh to sho w th rough the law Of corre

s pon den ce that th ere is a tree of li f e within th e

soul of man and that this soul consciousness

,

must have f ound some expre ssion in the phys

ical organism ; that th e tre e o f life is symbolized
in the body of man I b el iev e it t o be th e sola r
.

plexu s with its great mass of n erve s that lies

,
 Th e Tree f
o Lif e 277

back o f th e stomach and that thi s sola r plexus

,

is th e su n of li f e of th e whol e physical system .

Th at f rom it radiate all the magn etic and el e c

tric f o rc e s that en ergize life Th e brain may .

b e th e chi e f inst r ument of the mind but th e ,

solar pl exus is wh ere the soul has its gr eate st

expression Th e b rain is acted upon by
.

thought b u t th e solar plexus is acted upon by

,

feeling We ha v e n ot known nor understood

.

its u s e s to any ma rk e d d eg ree in the past It .

is only within re c ent ye a rs that attention has

b een di re ct ed to it but now t hat i t has b ee n
,

di re cte d th ere will b e a greater se eking aft er

,

knowl edge conc erning its princi pal uses a n d

f u nctions Th e id e al ist is always in the v an
.

gu a r d ; the sci entist com e s a fte r Scientific m en .

in th e n e a r f u t u re wi ll d ev ote mo re atte ntion to

th e acti on and infl uence of the s ola r pl exus than
th ey wi ll to any other pa rt o f the body and w e ,

may e xp e ct n ew discove ri e s sci entifica l ly f ormu

l ate d at n o ve ry distant date Th e sola r pl exus .

is th e c ent er o f f eeling th e c ent er of al l real love

,

and light Th e p re s ervation of the physical

.

o rganism is far mo re de pendent upon its action

than it is upon any oth e r o rgan of th e body .

With the right us e of this o rgan w e get th e

f ully en ergiz ed life ; but when w e allow exter
-

n alcondition and e motion to dist urb us at this

c ente r th en th e whole body be com e s sick Th e

, .
278 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

s oul use s thi s organ to produce harmon y of

vibration that wi ll aff ect th e wh ole body for
health and st rength This is the s un cent er o f
.

vibrati on Vib rati on s of ligh t of heat and of

.
, ,

m agn etism allhave their center s here But in .

order to hav e the solar plexus pe r form its p er

feet w ork we must go back O f all physical
organ i sm and touch the keynote of life It is
, .

the spiri t Of love the great white flame t hat

, ,

cause s the s olar plexus to vib rat e to the etern al

vibrati on s of the Cosmo s Th e body wi ll b e
.

quick to respond to the new mind and at the ,

s olar plexus man will begi n to b reath e the inner

breath the breath of th e Spirit Of Life the whol e
, , ,

or complete b reath O ccasionally now one who

.
,

has been deep in a state o f meditation i s con

scious of a breath action that is enti rely dif
f e ren t from that which we o rdinarily us e in
breathing O f the use of this b reath starting
. ,

as i t d oe s from a central point and making cir,

cle after ci rcle like a stone d ropp ed in st i ll

,

wat e r we are n ot yet ful ly consci ous It m ay

,
.

b e that it is this b re ath which will relate u s to

al letheric vibration Ther e can be n o quest i o n
.
,

howev e r b ut what it s e ff ect ev en in a mo men

, ,

t a ry way i s far beyond that p roduced by ordi

,

n ary breathi n g even when that b reathing is

,

under m ental cont rol Whil e one is b re athing

.

this inner b reath Of which I speak to all ap ,

28 0 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

as i t doe s to many peopl e who do not know how

to u s e their breath . Those who kn ow of the
ben efit s which ma y be de rive d from the right
u se o f o rdinary b re athing will b e b ette r able to
appreciate s omething of th e m e aning of this in

n er b r eath which s ee ms to ha v e i ts ris e in the

very center of being and to move out from th at

,

center aff ectin g both mind an d body Th e few

, .

people whom I h av e met who ha ve kn own o f

thi s inner breath are people who daily practice
meditati on When this b reath i s felt it is a l
.

way s at the close of meditation a s though th e ,

new action w ere s et up du ring th e me ditation .

In ev ery ca se it se ems to b e an inv ol u ntary a c

tion It does not follow aft er all m e ditation
.
,

but only aft er th e most p rofo und state of m e di

tation d oes on e feel its infl ue nc e I f eel con
,
.

vin ced O f one thing : that if it can b e conscio u sly

used its eff e ct upon the life of man will b e little

,

short of mi raculou s .

Th e oth er v ital o rgans of the body ar e stars

of di ff erent magnit u d es acte d u pon by this cen
,

tral impuls e of b eing Th e y co rre spond to the

.

tw el ve facu lti e s of mind B u t both mo on and

.

st a r s must be enlighten e d from within Th e y .

do not poss e ss light in and o f the msel ve s ; th e

s u n is th e mast e r
. What a man f eels re gulat e s
his life far mo re than what h e thinks Th e way .

of li fe i s a strait and a nar row one Just as .

 Th e Tree o f Lif e 28 1

soon a s man perc ei ve s that al l life must w ork

from th e c ent e r to th e ci r cumfere nc e just as ,

s oon as h e realiz e s that lo ve is th e only law of

life wi l l h e b egin to vib rat e from th e ce nt er
, .

Th e n f r om his own so ul wi l l b e radiate d every

thing that is now radiate d from th e sun Th e .

halo about his head and th e aura of light an d

,

color s urro unding his body will no longer b e in

visibl e but wi l l show fo rth as cl ea rly as do
,

th e p rismatic colo r s in th e rainbow Th e re will

.

b e an e nti re t ransformation in the whole life ,

w e might almost say a new c re ati on for th er e ,

will b e no mo re place for a law of sin and de ath .

Th ere wil l b e enti re fr e edom f rom pain and

dis e ase M an will b e subj e ct only to a law of
.

th e Spi rit of Li f e and this law will bring each

,

indi vidual l i f e into per fe ct ha rmony with his en

viron me n t with all fo rms of lif e
, Th e mind
.

will d ra w inspi ration fo r all its thought pict ure s -

fr om within and ne w glo ri e s will be found w ith

,

o u t Th e e a rs will vib r ate to n ew harmoni e s of

.

so und and m u sic fa r b eyond that which human

,

ea rs have ever h ea rd will b e added to the j oy

o u s n e s s of l i f e.Colo r far surpassin g that which
any paint er has bee n abl e to produce with b rush ,

f a r su rpassing any colo r which we hav e b e en

ab le to per c ei ve in natu re will come as an o u ter
revel ation o f th e inn er life We a re on th e bor
.

de rl a n d o f th e gre at e st of discover i e s th e wo rld

28 2 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

h as ever kn own an d the first an d greatest of

,

th es e will be the di s covery of the soul and the ,

con scious realization that God and man are o ne ;

that the man ifestation o f the power o f Go d on
ea rth is through the life o f man With such .

realiza t ion an d kn owledge man will consciously

,

begi n the creation o f the Ki ngdom of God u po n

earth .

Th e g rea t s eers an d prophets o f all ag e s have

had vi sion s wherein th ey not only s aw a n ew
,

earth but also a n ew heav en M an has been .

waiting to have reveal e d to both inne r and outer

vision the n ew heaven an d the new earth con
, ,

cern ing whi ch so many have fore told or proph e

si e d an d he has thought o f such coming as b e
,

ing the work of a divine providence in which

he had no say or part B u t all this is changing ;
.

the new heaven that is opening to his vision is

a result o f hi s own s ea rch aft er t ruth i s a state ,

o f consci ou s living in th e li f e of the spirit ;

th rough t he spiri t discerni ng what had s eemed

hidden or with h eld from him in th e past M ys .

tery afte r mystery shall be unfolded becaus e of

the ever i n c reasing light and under standing
-
.

Th e s pirit within him has been th e imp e lling

power that i s l e ading him to the discove ry of
a new heaven H is new h e aven wi ll be both a
.

con dition and a place ; a sta te of consciousn e ss

which will be fill e d with a wonder and glo ry of
28 4 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

able to pass f rom the outer con s cio usn e s s to th e

heavenly con sc iousnes s at wi ll an d al llife s ha ll
,

rej oice an d be glad Th e brotherh oo d o f man

.

s ha ll be re aliz e d in fact Love justice an d

.
,

equity will p rev ail Al lgreed o f gain wi l

. l have
ceased ; cc operation will supersede all competi
-

ti on yet ev e ry indi vidual will be le ft free to cc

,

operate with his fellowman according to his

be st th ought and judgmen t E ach person h av
.

ing recogn ized the di vine l aw in h is own life

wi ll have become a l a w unto him self E v ery .

thing on th e face o f the earth will be tran s

fo rmed quickened an d renewed ; the whole
,

earth shall r e joice an d be glad Uni versal love .

and peace shall reign in th e hearts and minds of

all people B u t all this will only mark the b e
.

ginning of an epoch or age in the life of ma n a ,

springtime wh ere in all things hav e become n ew

, .

But the spring can only fo reshadow what th e

s ummer and the ha rv e st are to b ring fo r eye ,

hath not s een ear hath not h ea rd n either

, ,

hath i t ent e re d into the heart of man to con

ceive o f the wond r o u s glo ri e s that a re awaiti n g

him Wh at the M ast er taught H is disciples to

.

pr ay for Th y Kingdom com e thy will b e don e

, ,

on earth a s i t is in H e aven was th e true ex !

,

planation of a p roph etic desire to be realized in

th e n ew springt ime of life M an will hav e
.

f o und th e plan in his own life and h e will mak e ,

 Th e Tree f
o Lif e 28 5

no more mistak es nor d o an y evil thin g in his

,

e flo rt to e xp r ess that plan Th e old book of

’
.

life will b e clos e d and his n ew book will be

,

Opene d and upon the page s of this book shall

,

nothing be w ritten that shall in any way defil e .

To th e e nlighte n e d soul of to day com e s the -

call : M ake s trait th e way of the Lord ! Pre

pa re for H is coming Th e myste ri es of life.

which ha ve b een withheld fr om th e ti me o f th e

foundation of th e wo rld shall be opened up ,

and th e awaken e d soul must pr oclaim the n ew

gospe l must use th e l e aves of the tree o f life
,

for th e h e aling o f th e nati ons Th e leaves of .

th e t ree of life are the di ff ere ntiat ions of l ov e ,

faith hop e joy peac e ge ntl eness goodness

, , , , , ,

powe r O nly as th e nations of th e earth take and

.

eat of the se l eave s will their h ealing com e Th e .

m edicin e that th e wo rld n ee ds fo r all i ts ills i s to

be fo u nd in the se l ea ve s of the tre e o f life .

Th ro ugh his mind man lai d hold of th e frui t of

the t ree of th e knowl edge o f good an d evil
things th at w ere pl e asing to the eye and go od ,

for food ; de sire fo r external po ssessions but -

th rough his inmost fee ling man will lay hold of

the tree o f li fe and will eat and li ve forever
, .

For Th e Spi rit its e lf be areth witn e ss with

o u r spi rit that we a re t he child re n of G od : an d
,

i f chi l dren th en h ei rs ; h ei rs o f God and joint

, ,

h ei r s with Christ ; i f so b e that w e su ff er wi th

28 6 A New H eaven an d a New E arth

H in t, th at we may be al so glo ri fied together F or

.

I rec kon th at the sufi erin gs of thi s presen t time

are not wo rthy to be comp ared with th e gl ory

whi ch sh al l be revealed in u s !
.

TH E END